Fostex Musical Instrument FD 4 User Manual

Owner’s Manual  
Model  
Digital Multitracker  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX RTN  
0
0
0
0
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
HIGH  
HIGH  
0
HIGH  
HIGH  
0
0
0
1
2
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
0
0
10  
10  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
900  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
RECORD TRACK  
LOW  
0
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
ADD. TRACK  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON SECTION  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
0
0
0
0
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
INPUT  
TRK1  
INPUT  
TRK2  
INPUT  
TRK3  
INPUT  
TRK4  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
MASTER  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
0
10  
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
SELECTOR  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
L/R  
L/R+MON  
MON  
1
2
3
4
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
1
2
3
4
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
L/R  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
5
0
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
0
H
M
L
H
M
L
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Introduction.............................................................................4  
Main features...........................................................................4  
Editing Tracks  
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste......................................56  
Erase..................................................................................58  
Track Exchange.................................................................60  
Recording Preparation  
Connecting a SCSI drive......................................................5  
Formatting a new disk........................................................6  
Removing a disk from the SCSI drive...............................7  
Formatting the disk again..................................................8  
Cue & Review Function  
Cue & Review function using  
the REWIND and F FWD button............................62  
Digital scrubbing using the JOG dial.............................62  
Cue&ReviewfunctionusingtheSHUTTLEfeature......62  
Names and Functions  
Control Panel (Mixer section)...........................................10  
Control Panel (Recorder section)....................................12  
Front Panel (Input/output section)................................18  
Rear Panel (Input/output section).................................18  
Display Section...................................................................20  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
Storing in real-time...........................................................63  
Editing and storing locate data.......................................64  
Editing and storing data..................................................64  
Editing the data stored in the LOCATE key..................65  
Before Starting  
Time Base.............................................................................24  
Recording method and REMAIN indicator...................25  
Managing songs by Program Change function............25  
Real track and Additional track.......................................26  
Input monitoring and playback monitoring................26  
PAN knob and Stereo bus................................................27  
Locate Function  
Direct Locate.......................................................................66  
Auto Play............................................................................66  
Auto Return........................................................................67  
Auto Repeat........................................................................68  
MIDI Synchronization  
Basic Application  
MIDI clock sync system....................................................71  
MTC sync/Machine Control system...............................72  
SYNC system in Slave mode..............................................74  
Basic Recording and Playback..........................................28  
FD-4 initial settings........................................................28  
Recordingonesoundsourcetoonetrack...................28  
Undo/Redo recording....................................................30  
Recording onto the additional track...........................30  
Checkingtherecordingsound......................................31  
Preview Function  
Executing the Preview function.......................................69  
Trimming the sound while previewing.........................70  
Basic Multitrack Recording..............................................32  
Recordingadrummachinetotrack1.........................32  
Overdubbing the bass to track 2..............................32  
Listeningtotheoverdubbedsound..............................33  
Undo/Redo overdubbing.............................................33  
Mixdown........................................................................34  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Saving song data................................................................77  
Loading song data.............................................................79  
Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP mode)  
Selecting SETUP mode.....................................................81  
Setting a time signature....................................................82  
Setting a Tempo..................................................................83  
Setting the Metronome function.....................................85  
Setting a preroll value.......................................................85  
Setting MIDI sync output signal......................................86  
Setting an MTC frame rate..............................................87  
Setting an MTC offset value............................................87  
Setting Offset mode...........................................................88  
Setting the Slave mode.....................................................88  
Setting the Slave type.......................................................89  
Setting the Record Protection function.........................90  
Setting digital input tracks..............................................91  
Setting digital output tracks............................................92  
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode...............................92  
Setting the MIDI device number.....................................93  
Handling Programs  
Creating a new Program....................................................36  
Using the Program Change function..............................37  
Deleting a Program...........................................................38  
Editing a Program title......................................................39  
Special Application  
Playback in Vari Pitch Mode............................................40  
Recording to a Metronome Sound..................................41  
Punch In/Out Recording..................................................43  
Auto Punch In/Out....................................................43  
Manual Punch In/Out................................................46  
Ping-Pong Recording.........................................................49  
Ping-Pong Recording to Additional Tracks..................51  
Digital Recording................................................................52  
Digitalrecordingfromanexternaldigitaldevice..52  
Digitalrecordingtoanexternaldevice....................53  
Digital mixdown..........................................................54  
How to use the RECORDER IN jack.................................55  
MIDIImplementationChart.....................................................94  
MMC Command List/Inquiry Message List.....................95  
Maintenance/Specifications...............................................96  
BlockDiagram.......................................................................97  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction/Main features  
• A “Digital Input Track Setting function” is used to record  
digital signals from CD or MD to any track on the FD-4.  
(This function is available when recording mode is set to  
Mastering mode 1 or 2.)  
Introduction  
Thank you for choosing the Fostex FD-4. The FD-4 is a  
four-track multitracker equipped with two additional  
virtual tracks. It uses a SCSI removable disk, such as a  
Zip cartridge or an MO disk, as a recording media to  
perform six-track recording and four-track playback.  
• A “Digital Output Track Setting function” enables you to  
output digital signals by selecting any two output sources  
from Real tracks 1-4 and the L/R outputs in the mixer section.  
• You can also use the DATA IN/OUT jacks to mix down digital  
signals to an external DAT, and to save and load song data  
(audio data and SETUP mode settings) to andfrom the DAT.  
Main features  
• A “Digital Remix function” allows for digital output of all  
twelve sources remixed in the mixer section.  
Mixer section  
The FD-4 is equipped with a four-channel analog mixer  
that achieves the high tonal quality required by state-  
of-the-art digital recording.  
• MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer can be transmitted  
according to the internal programmable Tempo Map.  
You can set up a synchronization system with a sequencer or  
a rhythm machine without wasting a track.  
• The mixer section features four input channels. Inputs 1  
and 2 supports line level input and Inputs 3 and 4 support  
a wide range of input sources, from line level to mic level.  
• You can use the FD-4 as a sync slave machine by sending  
MTC from a connected device.  
• Inputs 3 and 4 are equipped with a microphone amplifier, a  
three-stage trim switch, and an insert jack, as well as a  
balanced XLR connector.  
• The FD-4 supports MTC, MMC, and Fostex System Exclusive  
Message, which allows for advanced control and high-  
precision synchronization from external sequencing software.  
You can set the device number and MTC frame rate for MMC  
and Fostex System Exclusive Message. Also, “MTC Offset  
function” and “Offset Mode function” are useful for setting  
upasyncenvironmentusinganexternalsequencingsoftware.  
• All input channels have a three-point equalizer (two channels:  
shelving, one channel: parametric), that allow for a sharp  
and high-responsive tone adjustment.  
• Two AUX sends and returns allows for flexible sound  
processing. You can connect two ambient-type signal  
processors with stereo outputs.  
• Auto Punch In/Out and Manual Punch In/Out  
functions offer two modes: “Take” for a real recording,  
and “Rehearsal” for monitoring the part between the in  
and out points.  
• The mixer section also features an “All Stereo Mix function”  
that facilitates producing a stereo masterpiece and allows  
you to master all sources in stereo, including synchronizing  
MIDI sound sources.  
• The “Program Select function” enables you to select a  
song from up to 99 songs and name the songs.  
• Recorder In jacks (L/R) are used to record audio  
directly to the recorder section, bypassing the mixer  
section.  
Recorder section  
TheFD-4’srecordersectionusesarecordingformatcalled  
FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-3). It uses an  
external SCSI device (stationary disk or removable disk)  
as the recording media.  
• A “Bar/Beat Resolution function” is used to edit audio  
at the beginning of the beat (round up or round off to  
a beat).  
• Two Additional tracks enable for stereo ping-pong recording  
of four Real tracks.  
• The “Metronome function” can be used as a rhythm  
guide for recording.  
• The FD-4 features non-destructive audio editing (a great  
advantage of digital recording) such as Copy & Paste, Move  
& Paste, Erase, etc. You can choose Time Base (ABS or MTC)  
or MIDI bar/beat/clock as the unit.  
• Various edit functions using an edit point (locate  
point), such as Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase, Auto  
Punch In/Out, Auto Locate, are available. You can also  
locate ABS 0 or REC END regardless of the edit point  
(locate point).  
• Three recording modes: Normal mode, Mastering mode 1,  
and Mastering mode 2, to support various recording media.  
• You can set a preroll time of 0 to 10 seconds.  
• A “Preview function” allows for an intuitive fine-adjustment  
of an editing point (locate point).  
• A “Disk Remain Display function” offers a clear  
indication of available recording time and disk space  
(in mono track recording). You can choose the Time  
Base from ABS, MTC, and BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
• An “Undo/Redo function” enables you to easily correct  
recording and editing mistakes.  
• A “Vari Pitch function” allows you to fine-tune the pitch.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording preparation  
Recording Preparation  
The FD-4 does not include recording/playback media.  
SCSI connector  
SCSI terminator  
First you need to connect a SCSI drive and format a disk  
so that you can record, play back, and edit on the FD-4.  
You may use a removable SCSI drive, such as an MO drive,  
EZ drive or a Zip drive. For more information on removable  
SCSI disks supported by the FD-4, refer to the “List of the  
drives with operation guaranteed” attached to this manual.  
AUX RTN  
2
R
MON OUT  
L
R
MIX OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
FOSTEX does not guarantee data integrity recorded on the  
FD-4 using an unlisted removable drive.  
<About damages>  
Fostex is not responsible for any “direct damage” or “ indirect dam-  
age” caused by using the FD-4.  
SCSI cable  
SCSI drive  
<About copyrights>  
It is prohibited law to use any part of a CD recording or video im-  
ages or audio data for which a copyright is possessed by a third  
party for commercial purpose such as contents, broadcasts, sales,  
or distribution - any purpose other than for your personal pleasure.  
• Aftermakingtheconnection,turnonthepower  
to the FD-4 and the SCSI drive.  
If the connection is made correctly, turning on the power  
to both devices will display the “Initial..” message, then the  
“No Disk” message. (The following example assumes that a  
removable SCSI drive is connected. If a stationary disk is  
connected, the [UnFormat ?] message (see the next page)  
appears instead of the [No Disk] message.)  
Connecting a SCSI drive  
Connect a SCSI drive to the SCSI terminal on the FD-4. Refer  
to the figure on the right and read the notes and steps  
described here to connect the drive.  
This message means that a disk has not been inserted into  
the SCSI drive. Follow the steps on the next page to set up  
and format the disk so that you can use it to record and  
play back.  
• Handling a SCSI drive  
A SCSI drive and its disk are made of precision parts that are sus-  
ceptible to strong external impact and magnetic fields. Handle them  
carefully. Do not drop them on the floor or place them near a device  
that could generate a strong magnetic field (such as a large TV,  
speakers, etc.). Read the instruction manual that comes with your  
SCSI drive before you try to connect it to the FD-4.  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
• Notes on connection  
1.You can connect only one SCSI drive to the FD-4’s SCSI  
terminal. Do not “daisy-chain” multiple SCSI drives.  
2.InstallaSCSIterminatorontheotherconnectorontheconnected  
SCSI drive. (If it has a termination switch, be sure to turn the  
switch to “terminate” or “on.”)  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
3.Before making the connection, be sure to turn off the power to all  
devices.  
4.The FD-4 has a 25-pin female SCSI connector that supports the  
Macintosh. Use an appropriate, standard SCSI cable.  
Fix the connector of the cable with screws.  
<Note>  
If the “No Drive !” message and the “Initial..” message flash alter-  
nately on the display when you turn on the power, the FD-4 cannot  
recognize the SCSI drive. Check to see whether all connections  
are made correctly, that the power to the SCSI drive is turned on,  
and that the cable is not defective.  
5.There is no restriction regarding the ID number for a connected  
SCSI drive. The FD-4 will automatically recognize and display  
the ID number that is set on the SCSI drive.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording preparation  
Formatting a new disk  
Follow the procedure below to format a new disk.  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
SURE?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
ADD. TRACK  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
4
5
2
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
There are three recording modes (see the following table).  
In most cases, select [Normal] (Normal mode) ,which is cur-  
rently displayed. If you prefer higher quality recording  
(CD-level quality with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz), select  
“Mastering mode 1” or “Mastering mode 2.” Note that avail-  
able recording time is shorter in Mastering mode 1 and 2.  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
3
<Recording mode>  
5
Available recording  
track in real-time  
Recording  
mode  
Sampling  
rate  
Quantization  
4 Real tracks  
+
2 Additional tracks  
1. Insert a disk into the SCSI drive.  
DAC *  
Normal mode  
32 kHz  
If you insert an unformatted disk or a disk in an inappro-  
priate formats, the FD-4 recognizes that the disk is  
“unformatted,” displays the “Unformat!” message, then  
automatically enters SETUP mode, and displays the “For-  
mat ?” menu.  
4 Real tracks  
+
2 Additional tracks  
Mastering  
mode 1  
16-bit linear  
16-bit linear  
44.1 kHz  
At this time, the ID number of the connected SCSI drive will  
appear and [SURE ?] will blink on the display. (In the fol-  
lowing example, the FD-4 recognizes that the ID number of  
the connected SCSI drive is set to [ID 2].)  
4 Real tracks  
(See Notes below.)  
Mastering  
mode 2  
44.1 kHz  
(*) Digital Audio Acoustic Coding.  
<Notes>  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
* You can record only to Real tracks on a disk formatted in  
Mastering mode 2.  
A.PUNCH  
However, you can perform operations other than recording, such  
as “Track Exchange,” using Additional tracks.  
For more information, refer to the “Real track and Additional  
track” section of the “Before Starting” chapter.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SURE ?  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
* After you record data on a disk formatted in Normal mode, if you  
mix down the data digitally to DAT, copy the data, or save or  
loadthesongdata, select32kHz/SPmodeasarecordingmode  
for the DAT recorder.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
* The FD-4 employs a recording format called “FDMS-3” (Fostex  
Disk Management System-3), which is also used on the Fostex  
digital master recorder D-160.  
2. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-4 displays [Pls Wait !], then immediately displays  
the recording mode menu, with [Normal] and [SURE ?] flash-  
ing as shown below.  
Therefore, the D-160 can play back data that was recorded in  
Mastering mode 1 or 2 on the FD-4. However, the D-160 can  
not play back data recorded in Normal mode.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording preparation  
3. Turn the JOG dial to select a recording mode.  
<Note 1>  
When you format a disk, a Program is named “temporary title.”  
You can edit this title as you wish. For more information, refer to “Edit-  
ing a Program title” of the “Handling Programs” chapter on page 39.  
Turning the JOG dial counter-clockwise (to the left) will  
display the recording mode indication in the order of [Nor-  
mal] -> [Master 2] -> [Master 1].  
<Note 2>  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Formatting will automatically create one Program on the disk. You can  
create up to 99 Programs, depending on the available disk space.  
You can also select a desired Program from multiple Programs.  
For more information, refer to “Managing songs by Program Change  
function” in the “Before Starting” chapter on page 25. For more infor-  
mation, refer to “Using a Program Change function” on page 37.  
SURE?  
SURE?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
<Note 3>  
SURE?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
If you format a disk in Master 1 or Master 2 recording mode, the sam-  
pling rate indicator [44.1kHz] lights up. If you select Normal mode,  
nothing lights up.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key while holding  
down the RECORD button.  
<Note 4>  
After formatting the disk, the FD-4 automatically selects ABS as Time  
Base. You can selectABS, MTC time, or BAR/BEAT/CLK as the Time  
Base. For more information, refer to the “Display Section” in the “Names  
and Functions” chapter on page 21.  
The [Format ?] message lights up on the display, and a nega-  
tive value of the unformatted disk area size (Megabytes)  
will count down as the format operation progresses. All keys  
will be disabled during the format operation. Please wait a  
while.  
<Note 5>  
The indicated “SYNC OUT” setting ([CLK]) means that clock signals  
(MIDI clock signal and Song Position Pointer) are output as a sync  
signal from the FD-4’s MIDI OUT connector to an external MIDI de-  
vice. You may change this setting, if necessary, when you are using  
the FD-4 to sync with an external MIDI device. For more information,  
refer to “SYNC OUT setting” in the “Changing the Initial Settings” chap-  
ter on page 86.  
When formatting is complete, [COMPLETED !] lights up on  
the display, and the FD-4 stops accessing the SCSI disk. The  
display looks something like below. (If you have selected  
Mastering mode 1 or 2, [44.1kHz] lights up on the display.)  
SETUP  
Now that you completed connecting the SCSI drive and for-  
matting the disk, you can start recording and playing back.  
COMPLETED  
!
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Removing a disk from the SCSI drive  
5. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
If a removable disk is inside the SCSI drive, you cannot  
eject it using the eject switch on the drive. Follow the proce-  
dure below using the key on the control panel of the FD-4  
to eject the disk.  
Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key to exit SETUP  
mode. The Time Base will change to ABS (ABS 0 appears).  
Formatting will automatically create one Program on the  
disk (PGM 01), and display its title (#0001). (This title also  
appears whenever you insert a formatted disk in the SCSI  
drive.) The display indicators mean the following:  
1. Press the EXIT/NO key while holding down  
the SHIFT key.  
Program number  
Temporary title” for  
The disk is ejected from the SCSI drive and [No Disk] ap-  
pears on the display.  
(See Note 2.)  
Program 1 (See Note 1.)  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
1
ADD. TRACK  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
ABS  
M
S
F
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
PGM  
SCSI  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
CLK  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
ABS time 0  
ABS is selected as  
Time Base. (See  
Note 4.)  
The current drive  
is a SCSI drive.  
The default setting of  
SYNC OUT (See Note 5.)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording preparation  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Formatting the disk again  
As explained in the “Formatting a new disk” section, the ID  
number of the connected SCSI drive appears and [SURE ?]  
flashes on the display.  
If you wish to change the recording mode of a formatted  
disk or to re-format a used disk, you need to set the FD-4 to  
SETUP mode and use the [Format ?] menu.  
In the following procedure, we assume that the power to  
the FD-4 and the SCSI drive is already turned on.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SURE ?  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
1. Insert a disk into the SCSI drive.  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
When you insert a formatted disk into the SCSI drive, the  
FD-4 displays the recording mode of the disk (Master 1,  
Master 2, or Normal) and the type of Time Base that was  
used previously.  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
[Pls Wait !] appears momentarily, then the recording mode  
selection display appears.  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
2
ADD. TRACK  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
8
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
4, 5, 7  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
SETUP  
3, 6  
Flashing  
SURE?  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
8
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
7
2. Press the SETUP key.  
6. Use the JOG dial to select a recording mode.  
The FD-4 enters SETUP mode and displays the first layer, in  
which you can select the desired SETUP menu.  
Refer to the “Formatting a new disk” section for more infor-  
mation on recording modes.  
If the FD-4 enters SETUP mode after you format a disk or  
turn on the power and insert a disk, the FD-4 displays the  
first layer of the [Sign. Set ?] (signature setting) menu as  
shown below. (“?” flashes.)  
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key while holding  
down the RECORD button.  
Otherwise, the FD-4 displays the first layer of the menu  
that was shown before the FD-4 exited SETUP mode.  
The FD-4 starts formatting the disk in selected recording  
mode. Wait a while. When formatting is complete, [COM-  
PLETED !] lights up on the display, and the FD-4 stops ac-  
cessing the disk.  
SETUP  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SETUP  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
COMPLETED  
!
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Turn the JOG dial and select [Format ?].  
You can also use the HOLD/> key, REWIND button, or F  
FWD button to select the [Format ?] menu.  
8. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
SETUP  
Flashing  
The FD-4 exits SETUP mode and displays ABS 0.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Names and Functions  
Rear panel  
L
R
O U T  
M I D I  
I N  
M I D I  
I N / O U T  
P U N C H  
O U T  
A T D  
I N  
A T D  
P O W E R  
S C S I  
R E C O R D E R I N  
A
A
M O N O / L  
R
R
T
3
4
I N S E R  
M O N O / L  
R
R
A U X 2 S E N D  
1
L
O U T  
R
S T  
L
R
M O N O U T  
T N  
1
A U X  
T N  
2
A U X  
3
I N P U T  
4
I N P U T  
Control panel  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX RTN  
0
0
0
0
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
HIGH  
HIGH  
0
HIGH  
HIGH  
0
0
0
1
2
-
+
-
+
-
+
+
-
+
0
0
10  
10  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
900  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
5k  
RECORD TRACK  
3/L 4/R  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
0
1/L  
2/R  
L
R
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
ADD. TRACK  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON SECTION  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
0
0
0
0
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
INPUT  
TRK1  
INPUT  
TRK2  
INPUT  
TRK3  
INPUT  
TRK4  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
MASTER  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
0
10  
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
PAN  
R
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PGM SEL  
VARI  
ELECT  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
PITCH  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
SELECTOR  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
L/R  
L/R+MON  
MON  
TRK  
1
TRK  
2
3
4
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
1
2
3
4
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
L/R  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
5
0
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
0
H
M
L
H
M
L
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
Front panel  
1
2
4
3
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Control Panel (Mixer Section) Letters in brackets ([ ]) are labels on the panel.  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX RTN  
0
0
0
0
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
7
6
EQ  
0
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
0
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
0
0
1
2
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
0
0
10  
10  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
8
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
900  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
300  
200  
2k  
5k  
RECORD TRACK  
LOW  
0
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
ADD. TRACK  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON SECTION  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
0
0
0
0
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
5
4
3
2
INPUT  
TRK1  
INPUT  
TRK2  
INPUT  
TRK3  
INPUT  
TRK4  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
MASTER  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
9
0
10  
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
TRK  
SELECTOR  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
L/R  
L/R+MON  
MON  
1
2
3
4
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
10  
1
2
3
4
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
L/R  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
1
5
0
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
0
H
M
L
H
M
L
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
11  
12  
During recording, you can use them to pan channel signals of the  
sound sources connected to the INPUT jacks to Tracks 1-4 (or  
Tracks 5 and 6). Turn the knobs all the way to Lor R. If you turn the  
knob to L, the corresponding channel signal is recorded to Tracks  
1and3(and5). IfyouturntheknobtoR, thecorrespondingchannel  
signal is recorded to Tracks 2 and 4 (and 6). (Tracks 5 and 6 are  
available only in Mastering mode 1 and Normal mode.)  
1. Input faders [1-4]  
These faders allow you to control the input level of signals  
selected via the INPUT SEL switch [2] (that is, the input  
signals from the INPUT jacks or the recorder output signals).  
Nominal level is obtained at fader position of 7-8, and the  
fader achieves approximately 6dB of gain at the 10 position.  
1
2
For mixdown, use these knobs to determine the stereo image of  
the playback sound of Tracks 1-4. Turn the knobs to the desired  
position.  
2. Input select switches [INPUT SEL (INPUT/OFF/TRK)]  
These switches allow you to select signals to be routed to  
the input faders. The following options are available:  
“INPUT”  
Signals from instruments and microphones connected  
to the INPUT jacks are routed to the channel faders.  
4. Monitor panpot knobs [PAN (MON L/MON R)]  
These knobs allow you to adjust the balance of the signals  
that were level-adjusted for the level via the MON knob [5]  
before you send them to the monitor section L and R. The  
following options are available.  
“OFF”  
“TRK”  
The switch is turned off. No signals are routed.  
Recorder output signals (TRK 1-4) are routed to the  
channel faders, with Track 1 output routed to Channel 1,  
Track 2 routed to channel 2, etc.  
“MON L”  
“Center”  
“MON R”  
The signal routed to the MON knob will be sent only to  
monitor section “L.”  
The signal routed to the MON knob will be sent to both  
monitor section “R” and “L” at the same level.  
3. Panpot knobs [PAN (L/R)]  
The signal routed to the MON knob will be sent only to  
monitor section “R.”  
Panpot knobs have the following two functions:  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
5. Monitor level control knob [MON (INPUT/TRK)]  
These knobs are used to select signals sent to monitor  
sections L and R, and to adjust the level of those signals.  
The following options are available.  
8. AUX return knobs [AUX RTN (1, 2)]  
These knobs allow you to adjust the input level of processed  
signals from a connected external effect unit.  
AUX RTN 1 These knobs enable you to adjust the input level of  
processedsignalsfromanexternaleffectunitconnected  
to theAUX RTN jack 1. The level of both signals input to  
AUX RTN 1 L/MONO and R will be adjusted equally.  
“TRK”  
The recorder output signals are sent to the monitor  
section. As you turn the knob to the right, the signal  
level becomes higher.  
AUX RTN 2 These knobs enable you to adjust the input level of  
processedsignalsfromanexternaleffectunitconnected  
to theAUX RTN jack 2. The level of both signals input to  
AUX RTN 2 L/MONO and R will be adjusted equally.  
“0”  
No signals are sent.  
“INPUT”  
Pre-fader signals* from the INPUT jacks are sent to the  
monitor section.As you turn the knob to the left, the signal  
level becomes higher.  
9. Monitormasterknob[MONITORSECTION(MASTER)]  
This knob allows you to adjust the final level of monitoring  
signals, thatis, theheadphonevolumeandthelevelofsignals  
output from the MON OUT L/R jacks.  
* Pre-fader signal: Input signals before reaching the input faders  
6. Equalizer control knobs [EQ (HIGH/MID/LOW)]  
These knobs are used to adjust tonal quality of the signals  
routed to the channel faders. The following settings are  
available.  
10. Monitor select switch  
[SELECTOR (L/R, L/R+MON, MON)]  
This switch allows you to select a signal to be routed to the  
MON OUT L/R and PHONES jacks. The following options  
are available.  
“HIGH”  
Signals with a frequency of 12kHz will be boosted/cut up  
to +/-15dB.  
“MID GAIN” The frequency range selected via the MID SHIFT knob  
(200Hz-5kHz) will be boosted/cut up to +/-15dB.  
“L/R”  
This selects signals output from the STEREO OUT L/R  
jacks (stereo bus L/R signals).  
“MID SHIFT” Use this setting to select a frequency range to boost or  
cut using the MID GAIN knob. You can set the frequency  
in the range of 200Hz-5kHz.  
“L/R+MON”  
This selects both signals output from the STEREO OUT  
L/R jacks and signals routed to channel monitor buses  
L/R.  
“LOW”  
Signals with a frequency of 80Hz will be boosted/cut up  
to +/-15dB.  
“MON”  
This selects signals routed to channel monitor buses L/  
R.  
11. Master fader [L/R]  
The master fader allows you to adjust the level of signals  
output from the STEREO OUT L/R jacks (stereo bus L/R  
output signal). The fader setting will affect the level of  
recorder input signals.  
12. Input level switches [LEVEL (H/M/L)]  
Set these switches to appropriate positions according to the  
output level of the devices connected to input jacks 3 and 4  
(the phone jacks on the front panel or the XLR connector  
on the rear panel).  
7. AUX send knobs [AUX (AUX 1/AUX 2)]  
Connect a microphone or other low-output device to input  
jacks 3 and 4 (on the front panel or rear panel) that have  
the input level switch. Refer to the example below.  
These knobs are used to select whether the channel fader  
signals are output from the AUX SEND 1 jack or AUX SEND  
2 jack, and to adjust the level of those signals. That is, the  
signals selected and adjusted via these knobs will be sent  
from the AUX SEND jack 1 or 2 to an external device, such  
as an effect unit.  
<Example>  
“L (-50dB)”  
Set the switch to this position when you connect  
a microphone.  
“M (-30dB)”  
Set the switch to this position when you connect  
a single-coil or humbucking type electric guitar or  
bass.  
“AUX 1”  
Signals are sent to theAUX SEND jack 1. Turning the knob  
to the left will increase the output level.  
“0”  
No signals are sent.  
“H (-10dB)  
Set the switch to this position when you connect  
a keyboard or drum machine.  
“AUX 2”  
Signals are sent to theAUX SEND jack 2. Turning the knob  
to the right will increase the output level.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Control panel (Recorder Section)  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
39  
38  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
ADD. TRACK  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
19  
20  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
36  
32  
33  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
21  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
41  
28  
29  
22  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
40  
37  
27  
31  
23 34  
26  
24  
35  
30 25  
13. Record track select keys  
[RECORD TRACK (1/L, 2/R, 3/L, 4/R, L, R)]  
Refer to page 26 for more information on playback monitoring  
and input monitoring.  
These keys enable you to select “SAFE” or “READY” for a  
recording track. Pressing the key once will cause the  
corresponding track to enter READY mode, and the LED of  
the key you pressed to flash. Pressing the key again will  
cause the corresponding track to enter “SAFE” mode, and  
the LED to turn off.  
Refer to page 28 for more information on using the RECORD  
TRACK select keys.  
14. LCD  
The LCD indicates signal levels and various settings.  
The indication; 1/L, 2/R, 3/L, 4/R are for Real tracks, and L  
and R are for Additional tracks 5 and 6.  
Refer to “Display Section” on page 20 for more information  
on the display.  
When you start recording on a track in READY mode, the  
flashing LED remains lit steadily.  
If you press only the RECORD button with a track in READY  
mode, you can monitor the signal input to the READY track  
so that you can adjust the recording level. To cancel this  
input monitoring status, press the RECORD button again.  
(This causes the FD-4 to enter playback monitoring mode.)  
You can also use these select keys to select tracks to edit for  
Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase, etc.  
15. Contrast adjustment knob  
Use this knob to adjust the contrast of the LCD. Turning  
this knob clockwise will increase the contrast, and turning  
it counter-clockwise will decrease the contrast.  
<Note>  
The display is not illegible if you leave the knob counter-  
clockwise all the way.  
<Note>  
You can record on Additional tracks in real-time only when  
recording mode is “Normal mode” or “Mastering mode 1.”  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
16. Display indication select key  
Pressing this key each time will change the display indication  
as follows:  
Refer to pages 7, 56 and 81 for more information on the  
operation of this key.  
21. Access LED [ACCESS]  
Currently-selected Time Base indication *1  
Currently-selected Time Base REMAIN indication *2  
External MTC IN indication *3  
This LED lights up or flashes when data is being written to  
or read from an external SCSI drive disk.  
<Note>  
Do not turn off the power to the unit when this LED lights up  
or flashes. Otherwise you may lose data on the hard disk  
connected to the unit.  
*1 The current position in terms of Time Base selected via the TIME  
BASE SEL key appears. ABS time, MTC time, or BAR/BEAT/CLK is  
used.  
22. JOG dial [JOG/ SHUTTLE ]  
When the FD-4 is stopped, use the JOG dial to perform a jog  
operation (forward or reverse) for audio scrubbing without  
pitch change. You can also use this dial to increase and  
decrease the numeric values or input alphabetical characters  
in edit mode.  
*2Available recording time and space on the current SCSI disk appears.  
Time indication uses the currently-selected Time Base (ABS, MTC, or  
BAR/BEAT/CLK). The space indication uses MB (Megabyte). (The  
values are based on mono track recording.)  
Rotating the JOG dial while holding down the SHIFT key  
will enable you to perform the shuttle operation with  
different speeds ranging from normal speed to 64-times  
speed.  
*3 MTC being input from an external MIDI device to the FD-4 appears.  
If no MTC is input, the display shows “00H 00M 00S 00F.”  
17. Setup key [SETUP]  
Refer to page 62 for more information on the cue/review  
function and the shuttle function.  
Press this key to set the FD-4 in SETUP mode to execute  
various menus. This key works only when the FD-4 is  
stopped.  
23. Fast forward button [F FWD]  
Pressing this button while the FD-4 is stopped will start fast  
forwarding at low speed at first, then gradually accelerate  
to 30-times speed. If you press this button while the FD-4 is  
playing, cueing (fast forwarding with sound) starts at three-  
time speed. Pressing this button while holding down the  
STOP button will activate the “LOCATE REC END” operation,  
which will locate the end point of the recording on the Real  
track in the current Program. You can also use this button  
to locate an edit point in edit mode.  
Refer to page 81 for more information on SETUP mode.  
18. Time Base select key  
Pressing this key repeatedly will switch Time Base as follows:  
ABS time  
BAR/BEAT/CLK  
MTC time  
Refer to the “STOP button” section and page 66 for more  
information on the “LOCATE ABS 0” operation.  
24. Rewind button [REWIND]  
19. Execute/Yes key [EXECUTE/YES]  
Pressing this button while the FD-4 is stopped will start  
rewinding at low speed at first, then gradually increase the  
speed up to 30-times speed. If you press this button while  
the FD-4 is playing, cueing (rewinding with sound) starts at  
three-times speed. Pressing this button while holding down  
the STOP button will activate the “LOCATE ABS 0” operation,  
which will locate the beginning of the current Program (ABS  
time: 00m 00s 00f). You can also use this button to locate  
an edit point in edit mode.  
Press this key to confirm the edit operations, such as Copy  
& Paste, Move & Paste, and Erase, and to set the parameters  
of SETUP menus.  
Refer to pages 56 and 81 for more information on the  
operation of this key.  
20. Exit/No key [EXIT/NO/ EJECT ]  
This key is the counterpart of the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Press this key to cancel an operation. When you use a  
removable SCSI disk, pressing this key while holding down  
the SHIFT key will eject the disk.  
Refer to the “STOP button” section and page 66 for more  
information on the “LOCATE ABS 0” operation.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
25. Play button [PLAY]  
* Refer to pages 57 and 66 for more information on these  
operations.  
Pressing this button causes the recorder section to play back.  
Pressing this button while holding down the RECORD button  
when a track is in READY mode will cause the FD-4 to start  
recording on the READY track.  
* Refer to page 46 for more information on the Punch In/Out  
operation using a foot switch.  
27. Record button [RECORD/ AUTO PUNCH ]  
Pressing only this button during the recording operation  
will punch-out (cancel) recording. Pressing this button while  
holding down the STOP button will cause the “CLIPBOARD  
PLAY” operation to start.  
Pressing the PLAY button while holding down this button  
will cause the FD-4 to start recording on any READY tracks.  
At this time, the flashing LED of the RECORD TRACK select  
key for the corresponding READY track lights up steadily,  
and the PLAY LED and the RECORD LED light up.  
* Refer to the “STOP button” section and page 57 for more  
information on the “CLIPBOARD PLAY” operation.  
If you press only the RECORD button, a READY Real track  
enters input monitoring mode (The RECORD LED flashes.).  
At this time, pressing the RECORD button again will cancel  
the input monitoring mode, and the track will return to  
playback monitoring mode.  
* Refer to page 48 for more information on the Punch Out  
operation using the PLAY button.  
26. Stop button [STOP]  
Pressing the RECORD button while holding down the SHIFT  
key will toggle between AUTO PUNCH on and off.  
Pressing this button during the playback, recording, fast  
forward, orrewindoperationwillstoptherecordertransport  
operation. Pressing this button while the FD-4 is in SETUP  
mode will cause the unit to exit SETUP mode.  
Pressing the PLAY, REWIND, or F FWD button while holding  
down the STOP button will cause the following operations  
to start.  
* Refer to page 28 for more information on recording.  
* Refer to page 43 for more information on AUTO PUNCH  
mode.  
* Refer to page 26 for more information on input monitoring  
and playback monitoring.  
If you wish to rehearse the Manual Punch In/Out operation  
using the foot switch, press the foot switch while holding  
down this button to enter Rehearsal mode.  
28. Shift key [ SHIFT ]  
PLAY  
Press a key, button, or turn the dial while holding down the  
SHIFTkeytoactivatethefollowingshift-invokedfunctions.  
“CLIPBOARD PLAY” operation starts. (See  
below.) . During the operation, the STOP  
LED flashes and the PLAY LED lights up.  
You can audition the data at edit points  
(locate points) stored in the memory  
The removable SCSI disk is  
STOP  
REWIND  
keys. (For more information, refer to  
ejected. (Refer to “Recording  
“Preview function” on page 69.)  
ABS 0 is located. (See below.)  
Preparation” on page 7.)  
RECORD TRACK  
F FWD  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
ADD. TRACK  
REC END is located. (See below.)  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
* CLIPBOARD PLAY operation  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
The CLIPBOARD PLAY operation plays back data on the clipboard. (If the  
clipboard does not contain any data, the display shows [Void Data !] and  
nothing happens.). During this operation, the display indicates the type of  
the data (“Copy Clip” for copy data, and “Move Clip” for move data), and the  
duration. The indicator of the copy source or move source track flashes.  
In this way, you will know which track the currently playing data comes from  
and why the data is on the clipboard.  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
Auto Punch mode  
is turned on and  
off. (Refer to  
“Punch In/Out” on  
page 43.)  
The SHUTTLE dial  
function is activated.  
(Refer to “JOG dial/  
* ABS 0 locate operation  
You can edit locate  
data stored in the  
LOCATE key. (Refer  
to “Storing an edit  
point (locate point)” on  
page 63 for more  
information.  
This operation locates the beginning of the current Program (ABS time:  
00m 00s 00f).  
SHUTTLE  
dial  
You can edit Vari Pitch data.  
(Refer to “Playback in Vari Pitch  
mode” on page 40 for more  
information.)  
cueingonpage62for  
more information.)  
* REC END locate operation  
This operation locates the end of the audio recording (REC END) on the  
Real track in the current Program.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
29.Vari Pitch key [VARI PITCH/ P.EDIT ]  
31. Locate key [LOCATE/ LOC MEM ]  
This key toggles Vari Pitch mode on and off. When Vari Pitch  
mode is on, the “VARI PITCH” indicator lights up on the  
display, and the FD-4 plays using the current pitch data.  
Pressing the VARI PITCH key while holding down the SHIFT  
key will cause the FD-4 to enter edit mode, in which you can  
change pitch data in real-time.  
Use this key to locate a point. Press a key that stores locate  
points, such as the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT keys, AUTO PUNCH  
IN/OUT keys, and AUTO RTN START/END keys, then press  
the LOCATE key to locate a point stored in the  
corresponding key.  
The last locate data will replace the data stored in the  
LOCATE key. Therefore, pressing only the LOCATE key will  
locate the last locate point. If you have set Auto Play mode,  
the FD-4 will start playing from the located point.  
Pressing the LOCATE key while holding down the SHIFT  
key will cause the FD-4 to enter edit mode, in which you  
can edit data stored in the LOCATE key.  
To exit edit mode, press the EXIT/NO key.  
Refer to page 40 for more information on playing with Vari  
Pitch and editing Vari Pitch data.  
Refer to page 66 for more information on the Locate function.  
30.Auto Return/Auto Play mode on/off key  
Refer to page 63 for more information on editing data using  
the LOCATE key.  
[AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY]  
Use this key to turn on and off Auto Return mode, Auto Play  
mode, and Auto Repeat mode. Each time you press the key,  
the mode will change and the following indication will be  
displayed.  
32. Hold/> key [HOLD/>]  
Pressing the HOLD/> key while the recorder is operating  
will cause the FD-4 to capture the time at which you pressed  
the key (or bar/beat/clock value), display it, then enter  
edit mode. (If you press the HOLD/> key while the recorder  
section is stopped, the FD-4 enters edit mode directly.)  
To cancel edit mode, press the STOP button, DISP SEL key,  
or the EXIT/NO key.  
Auto Return/Play mode is OFF.  
(No indication)  
AUTO  
Auto Play mode is ON.  
(“PLAY” lights up.)  
AUTO  
PLAY  
In edit mode, you can use this key to select a digit of the  
valuetoedit(editpoint). Youcanselectadigitwhichflashes  
on the display) in the following order.  
Auto Return mode is ON.  
(“RTN” lights up.)  
AUTO  
AUTO  
RTN  
RTN  
ABS or MTC is used as Time Base:  
Auto Repeat mode is ON.  
First, “S” (second) flashes. Each time you press the HOLD/> key,  
the flashing characters change in this order: F -> SF -> H -> M-> S.  
PLAY  
(Both “PLAY” and “RTN” light up.)  
* Auto Play mode  
BAR/BEAT/CLK is used as Time Base:  
The FD-4 locates a point and starts playing from the locate point.  
First, “BAR” flashes. Each time you press the HOLD/> key, the  
flashing indicator changes in this order: -> CLK -> BAR.  
* Auto Return mode  
When the AUTO RTN END point is reached while the recorder section is  
playing, the FD-4 automatically locates the AUTO RTN START point.  
This mode is effective only if the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO  
RTN END point have already been specified.  
IfyoupresstheHOLD/>keyandtheSTOREkeysimultaneously  
while the recorder is stopped, the FD-4 enters Program Select  
mode, in which you can select a Program or set up a new  
Program.  
<Note>  
The Auto Return function is enabled only when the FD-4 is  
playing. While the FD-4 is recording, the FD-4 will not locate  
the START point after it reaches the AUTO RTN END point.  
Refer to page 63 for more information on editing memory.  
*Auto Repeat mode  
Refertopage37formoreinformationontheProgramSelect  
function.  
This mode is effective only whenAuto Play mode andAuto Return mode are  
turned on. The FD-4 will play the part between the AUTO RTN START point  
and the AUTO RTN END point repeatedly. This mode is also effective only if  
the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point have already  
been specified.  
Refer to page 66 for more information on each mode.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
33. Store key [STORE]  
35. Edit key [EDIT]  
This key is used to store time values (or bar/beat/clock  
values) in the memory keys. Press this key, then one of the  
following keys to store data indicated on the display  
(including edit data) in the corresponding memory key. If  
you press the STORE key and the HOLD/> key  
simultaneouslywhiletherecorderisstopped, theFD-4enters  
Program Select mode, in which you can select a Program or  
set up a new Program.  
Pressing this key causes the FD-4 to enter menu selection  
mode for editing tracks, and displays the title of the menu  
you used last time. Press this key repeatedly or turn the  
JOG dial to select a menu. The edit menus appear in the  
following order. To execute a desired menu, select the menu,  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
To exit selection mode, press the EXIT/NO key.  
Copy Clip  
Move Clip  
Press the STORE key, and press the CLIPBOARD IN key.  
The CLIPBOARD IN point is stored.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
Press the STORE key, and press the CLIPBOARD OUT key.  
The CLIPBOARD OUT point is stored.  
Copy Paste (or Move Paste *)  
Erase  
This data can be used as locate data.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO PUNCH IN key.  
The AUTO PUNCH IN point is stored.  
TRK Exchange  
This data can be used as locate data.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.  
The AUTO PUNCH OUT point is stored.  
(*) After you execute Copy Clip, “Copy Paste” appears. After you execute  
Move Clip, “Move Paste” appears.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 56 for more information on Copy & Paste and  
Move & Paste.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO RTN START key.  
The AUTO RTN START point is stored.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 58 for more information on Erase.  
* Refer to page 60 for more information on Track Exchange.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO RTN END key.  
The AUTO RTN END point is stored.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
36. Auto Return Start key  
To cancel the store operation after you have pressed this  
key, press the EXIT/NO key.  
[AUTO RTN START/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the start point (AUTO RTN START point)  
for the Auto Return function and the Auto Repeat function.  
When you press this key, the FD-4 displays the currently-  
stored data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press  
the STORE key, then the AUTO RTN START/PREVIEW key  
to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on the Locate function.  
* Refer to page 63 for more information on storing edit points  
(locate points).  
* Refer to page 37 for more information on the Program Select  
function.  
This memory is reset to the factory default value when you  
turn off the power to the FD-4.  
34. Undo/Redo key [UNDO/REDO]  
If you press the AUTO RTN START/PREVIEW key while  
holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped,  
you can preview the fade-in part at the stored AUTO RTN  
START point.  
If you wish to restore the status prior to editing, recording,  
or performing a punch in/out take, press the UNDO/REDO  
key. Pressing the UNDO/REDO key again will restore the  
status obtained before you pressed the [UNDO/REDO] key  
the first time.  
* Refer to page 63 for more information on setting and editing  
the AUTO RTN START point.  
When you undo the operation, [Undo!] appears. When you  
redo the operation, [Redo!] appears on the display for a  
short moment.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on the Auto Return  
and Auto Repeat functions.  
<Note>  
The Undo/Redo function is enabled only when the FD-4 is  
stopped.  
* Refer to page 69 for more information on previewing data  
at the AUTO RTN START point.  
Refer to pages 30, 31, 33, 46, 48, 50, 58 and 60 for more  
information on the Undo/Redo function.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
37. Auto Return End key [AUTO RTN END/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the start point (AUTO RTN END point)  
for the Auto Return function and the Auto Repeat function.  
When you press this key, the FD-4 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the AUTO RTN END/PREVIEW key to  
store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 63 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
* Refer to page 43 for more information on the Auto Punch In/  
Out functions.  
* Refer to page 69 for more information on previewing data at  
the AUTO PUNCH OUT point.  
If you press the AUTO RTN END/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-out part at the stored AUTO RTN END  
point.  
40. Clipboard In key [CLIPBOARD IN/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the start point of audio data to be  
copied or moved.  
When you press this key, the FD-4 displays data currently  
stored, and you can edit the data. After editing the data,  
press the STORE key, then press the CLIPBOARD IN/PREVIEW  
key to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can  
be used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 63 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on the Auto Return  
and Auto Repeat functions.  
If you press the CLIPBOARD IN/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-in part at the stored CLIPBOARD IN point.  
* Refer to page 69 for more information on previewing data  
at the AUTO RTN END point.  
* Refer to page 63 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
38. Auto Punch In key [AUTO PUNCH IN/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the punch in (recording start) point  
for the Auto Punch In/Out function The stored data is also  
used as a paste start point (for Copy & Paste, Move & Paste)  
and as an erase start point.  
* Refer to page 56 for more information on the Copy & Paste/  
Move & Paste functions.  
* Refer to page 69 for more information on previewing data at  
the CLIPBOARD IN point  
When you press this key, the FD-4 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the AUTO PUNCH IN/PREVIEW key  
to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
41. Clipboard In key [CLIPBOARD OUT/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the end point of audio data to be copied  
or moved.  
If you press the AUTO PUNCH IN/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-out part at the stored AUTO PUNCH IN point.  
When you press this key, the FD-4 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the CLIPBOARD OUT/PREVIEW key  
to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 63 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
IfyoupresstheCLIPBOARDOUT/PREVIEWkeywhileholding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-out part at the stored CLIPBOARD OUT  
point.  
* Refer to page 43 for more information on theAuto Punch In/  
Out functions.  
* Refer to page 69 for more information on previewing data at  
the AUTO PUNCH IN point.  
* Refer to page 63 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
39. Auto Punch Out key  
[AUTO PUNCH OUT/ PREVIEW ]  
* Refer to page 56 for more information on the Copy & Paste/  
Move & Paste functions.  
Use this key to store the punch out (recording end) point  
for the Auto Punch In/Out function The stored data is also  
used as an erase end point.  
* Refer to page 69 for more information on previewing data at  
the CLIPBOARD OUT point  
When you press this key, the FD-4 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the AUTO PUNCH OUT/PREVIEW  
key to store the edited data in this key.  
The stored data can be used as locate data.  
If you press the AUTO PUNCH OUT/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-in part at the stored AUTO PUNCH OUT point.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Front Panel (Input/Output Section)  
1
2
1
2
4
3
The phone jacks for input channels 3 and 4 on the front  
panel have priority. If you connect sound sources to these  
jacks, the balanced XLR jacks for input channels 3 and 4 on  
the rear panel will be disabled.  
1.Input jacks [1, 2, 3, 4] (Connector: phone)  
Connect sound sources, such as musical instruments and  
microphones, here.  
Connect a microphone to input jacks 3 and 4, which are  
equipped with TRIM switches that allow you to switch  
according to the connected microphone output level. Input  
channels 3 and 4 also support balanced XLR connectors on  
the rear panel.  
2.Headphone jack [PHONES] (Connector: stereo TRS phone)  
Connect headphones here. You can adjust the headphone  
volume using the MASTER knob in the monitor section.  
1
2
4
3
Rear Panel (Input/Output Section)  
2
4
1
3
5
6
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
R
MONO/L  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
R L  
SCSI  
POWER  
11  
14  
12  
13  
15  
10 9 8  
7
2. Stereo Out jacks [ST. OUT L, R] (Connector: RCA pin)  
These jacks output stereo bus L/R signals. Connect these  
jacks to the input jacks of a master recorder. You can adjust  
the output level using the master fader L/R.  
1. Monitor Out jacks [MON OUT L, R] (Connector: RCA pin)  
Connect monitoring speakers and amplifier or powered  
speakers here. These jacks output signals selected by the  
SELECTOR in the monitor section (L/R, L/R+MON, or MON).  
Use the MASTER knob in the monitor section to adjust the  
output level.  
R
ST OUT  
L
R
MON OUT  
L
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
3. AUX Send jacks 1, 2 [AUX SEND 1, 2]  
(Connector: phone)  
7. Recorder in jacks L, R [RECORDER IN L, R]  
(Connector: RCA pin)  
Connect these jacks to the input of an effect unit.  
These jacks are used to route analog signals input from an  
external device directly to the recorder section. Using these  
jacks enables you to use only the recorder section, bypassing  
the mixer section.  
The AUX SEND jacks send out signals selected and adjusted  
by the AUX send knobs to the connected effect unit.  
2
AUX SEND  
1
Signals input from these jacks are recorded to the tracks  
selected by the RECORD TRACK select keys.  
RECORDER IN  
L
R
4. AUX Return jacks 1, 2 [AUX RTN 1, 2]  
(Connector: phone)  
Connect these jacks to the output of an effect unit.  
You can also use these jacks as auxiliary inputs.  
Refer to page 55 for more information on using the  
RECORDER IN jacks.  
If a connected effect unit has a mono output, connect the  
output to the L/MONO jack of the FD-4. The right channel  
willalsoreceivethesamesignal. Adjustthelevelofprocessed  
signals using AUX RTN knobs 1 and 2.  
8. MIDI OUT jack [MIDI OUT] (Connector: DIN 5-pin)  
Connect this jack to the MIDI OUT jack of an external MIDI  
device.  
AUX RTN 2  
MONO/L  
AUX RTN 1  
MONO/L  
R
R
This jack transmits MTC (MIDI timecode), MIDI clock & Song  
Position Pointer, MMC (MIDI Machine Control) command,  
response, and FEX (Fostex System Exclusive Message)  
response.  
5. Insert jacks 3, 4 [INSERT 3, 4]  
(Connector: stereo TRS phone)  
MIDI  
OUT  
Use these jacks when you wish to apply an effect to the  
signal input at input jacks 3 and 4 (unbalanced inputs on  
the front panel or balanced inputs on the rear panel).  
In particular, use them when you wish to apply a  
compressor/limiter.  
Refer to page 71 for more information on the example of using  
the MIDI OUT jack.  
9. MIDI IN jack [MIDI IN] (Connector: DIN 5-pin)  
4
INSERT  
3
Connect this jack to the MIDI IN jack of an external MIDI  
device. You can control the FD-4 remotely by inputting  
MMC (MIDI Machine Control) command or FEX (Fostex  
System Exclusive Message) here.  
Refer to page 41 for more information on examples of using  
the INSERT jacks.  
MIDI  
IN  
6. Balanced input connectors 3, 4 [INPUT 3, 4]  
(Connector: balanced XLR)  
Refer to page 71 for more information on using the MIDI IN  
jack.  
Connect sound sources that have balanced outputs, such  
as musical instruments and microphones.  
Input channels 3 and 4 also support phone jacks on the  
front panel.  
10. Punch in/out jack [PUNCH IN/OUT]  
(Connector: phone)  
The phone jacks for input channels 3 and 4 on the front  
panel have priority. If you connect sound sources to these  
jacks, the balanced XLR jacks for input channels 3 and 4 on  
the rear panel will be disabled.  
Using an optional foot switch connected to this jack enables  
you to perform the Manual Punch In/Out operation  
(including rehearsal) using your foot. Connect an optional  
Fostex foot switch, Model 8051.  
INPUT 4  
INPUT 3  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
Pin 1: GND  
Refer to page 46 for more information on using the PUNCH  
IN/OUT jack.  
Pin 2: HOT  
Pin 3: COLD  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
11. Data output jack [DATA OUT] (Connector: OPTICAL)  
Connect this jack to the OPTICAL digital input of an external  
digitaldevicetosavesongdatatoaDATortorecorddigitally  
to a digital device (MD, DAT, CD-R, etc.).  
Display Section  
The FD-4 uses a liquid crystal display which integrates a 9-  
digit/35-dot message section, 7-segment display section,  
and level meters.  
DATA  
OUT  
The level meters indicate the output level of tracks 1-4 and  
stereo out L/R.  
The time display shows various temporal information in  
different units, such as ABS time (absolute time), MTC (MIDI  
timecode), BAR/BEAT/CLK (bar/beat/clock), and makes it  
easy to check the recorder’s current time.  
Refer to pages 52 and 76 for more information on using the  
DATA OUT jack.  
The message display shows various messages required to  
operate the FD-4, and offers interactive operation.  
Thissectiondescribesdisplayfunctionsalongwithexamples.  
12. Data input jack [DATA IN] (Connector: OPTICAL)  
ConnectthisjacktotheOPTICALdigitaloutputofanexternal  
digital device to load song data from a DAT or to record  
data digitally from a digital device (MD, DAT, CD-R, etc.) to  
the FD-4.  
Display when the power is turned on  
When you turn the power on to the FD-4 and the connected  
external SCSI drive (with a formatted removable disk  
inserted), the display shows the [Initial...] message, then  
Recording mode (Normal, Master 1 or Master 2), and finally  
the Time Base of the last Program that was used before you  
turned the power off.  
DATA  
IN  
Refer to pages 52 and 76 for more information on using the  
DATA IN jack.  
The following example shows that the FD-4 started with the  
ABS Time Base used in Program 1.  
13. SCSI connector [SCSI] (Connector: D-SUB 25-pin)  
Connect an external SCSI drive as the recording media for  
the FD-4.  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Refer to page 5 for more information on connecting an external  
SCSI drive.  
14. Power cable  
Connect the power cable to an AC outlet.  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
15. Power switch [POWER]  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
This switch turns power on and off to the FD-4.  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Preset display  
Lights up when the FD-4 receives MTC (MIDI Time  
Code) from an external device.  
M T C  
%
The display below shows all preset items for explanation  
purposes.  
Lights up when the FD-4 enters Vari Pitch data edit  
mode.  
MTC DIGITAL  
44.1kHz  
SETUP MTC OFFSET  
Indicates available disk space on the disk in  
megabytes when the REMAIN indicator appears.  
SLAVE  
MB  
MIDI  
BAR  
M
CLK  
MB  
REMAIN ABS  
LOC MTC IN  
H
S
DF  
SF  
Lights up to indicate a time value whenABS or MTC  
is used as Time Base.  
VARI PITCH TEMPO PGM  
H, M, S, F, SF  
SURE  
?
COMPLETED  
!
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Lights up to indicate a bar/beat/clock value when  
BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected as Time Base.  
BAR, , CLK  
Indicates a Program title, edit parameters, and  
SETUP mode parameters.  
The level meter shows the recorder output level and the  
recording level for tracks 1~4 and stereo bus L, R.  
Indicates the “SYNC OUT settings” in SETUP  
mode.  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
Lights up when ABS is selected as Time Base.  
Lights up when MTC is selected as Time Base.  
ABS  
MTC  
Indicates the AUTO PLAY/AUTO RTN mode  
settings.  
Lights up to indicate available recording time and  
space on the disk.  
REMAIN  
SETUP  
DRIVE  
Indicates the current drive. Usually, [SCSI] lights  
up.(*)  
Lights up when the FD-4 enters SETUP mode.  
A.PUNCH  
Indicates the AUTO PUNCH mode settings.  
Lights up when an edit operation (copy, move,  
paste, or erase) is completed.  
COMPLETED !  
SURE ?  
(*) When the FD-4 has the optional 2.5 inch internal IDE hard disk installed, and an  
external SCSI drive is not connected, [IDE] will be lit. However, even though an  
internal hard disk has been installed, if the external SCSI drive is connected, the SCSI  
drive will have priority and [SCSI] will be lit.  
Lights up to confirm or cancel the operation when  
you are making settings or edits.  
Lights up when the MTC Offset menu is selected  
in SETUP mode.  
Display examples for Time Base selected via the  
TIME BASE SEL key  
MTC OFFSET  
PGM  
Lights up to indicate the current Program number.  
You can use the TIME BASE SEL key to select ABS, BAR/  
BEAT/CLK, or MTC as Time Base. The following examples  
show the displays when you select a Time Base at the  
beginning of the disk of Program 1.  
Lights up when the tempo setting menu is selected  
in SETUP mode.  
TEMPO  
Lights up when Vari Pitch mode is turned on.  
VARI PITCH  
44.1kHz  
Time Base is ABS.  
Indicates a sampling rate of the corresponding  
Recording mode. It does not light up when the disk  
is formatted in Normal mode.  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
Lights up to indicate that MTC is input from an  
external MIDI device to the FD-4.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
MTC IN  
LOC  
Time Base is BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
Lights up when the FD-4 enters locate point (edit  
point) edit mode.  
BAR  
CLK  
Lights up when the digital input track settings are  
made in SETUP mode and the FD-4 is receiving  
digital signals correctly. However, if the FD-4 is not  
receiving digital signals correctly, or if there is a  
connection problem, this indicator flashes.  
FlasheswhenSlavemodeinSETUPmodeisturned  
on. When a signal is locked, the flashing indicator  
lights up steadily.  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
DIGITAL  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Time Base is MTC.  
SLAVE  
M I D I  
MTC  
H
M
S
F
PGM  
Lights up when the FD-4 is receiving effective MIDI  
messages (MMC or FEX) from an external device.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Time Base is MTC.  
Selecting Time Base using the DISP SEL key  
When you press the DISP SEL key after you select a Time  
Base using the TIME BASE SEL key, the display changes as  
follows:  
MTC  
H
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
CLK  
AUTO  
Time Base is ABS.  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
MB  
CLK  
SCSI  
REMAIN  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
MB  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
H
M
S
F
MTC IN  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
H
M
S
F
MTC IN  
The REMAIN display  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
The REMAIN display always indicates the figure converted to  
mono track.  
AUTO  
In other words, the remaining disk capacity for one track in  
which a recording can be made and the remaining time are  
displayed. The figure displayed here applies to all of the real  
tracks and additional tracks.  
Time Base is BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
For details on the REMAIN display, please refer to “FD-4  
recording type and the REMAIN indicator” in “Before starting”  
on page 25.  
BAR  
CLK  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
CLK  
AUTO  
Disk recordable remaining  
capacity is displayed.  
MB  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
BAR  
REMAIN  
MB  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
CLK  
AUTO  
Disk recordable remaining  
time is displayed.  
H
M
S
F
MTC IN  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
<Unformat !> message  
An unformatted or crashed SCSI disk.  
Warning messages  
After a few seconds of this display, the FD-4 automatically enters  
the SETUP mode [Format ?] menu.  
Action to take:  
The following warnings are shown operating mistakes are  
made, an unsuitable editing point (= locate point) is input,  
or when errors occur. If any of these warnings appear,  
refer to information detailed below.  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key while pressing the RECORD button.  
<Note>  
<Void Data> message  
Any sound data recorded up to this point on the disk will be lost.  
This means registered data necessary for the selected operation  
is incorrect.  
Action to take:  
Re-register the correct data.  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Track Over> message  
This means the number of recording tracks has been exceeded.  
Action to take:  
<Void Out> message  
Simultaneous recording is possible on only two tracks. Setup  
the recording track again.  
This means the registered in/out point is wrong.  
Action to take:  
Re-register the correct data.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Can’t Rec> message  
This means the specified additional track cannot be recorded.  
This is displayed when recording is attempted on the additional  
track by using the [Mastering mode 2] disk.  
Action to take:  
If recording is to be make on the additional track, format in the  
[Normal mode] or [Mastering mode 1].  
<Track unselected> message  
This means a track has not been specified.  
Action to take:  
Select any one track with the RECORD TRACK select key.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Over> message  
This means that disk space necessary for recording and editing  
is insufficient.  
<Rec + Yes !> message  
This means press the EXECUTE/YES key while pressing the  
RECORD button (This is displayed when formatting).  
Action to take:  
Action to take:  
Before proceeding to the next operation, temporarily data in  
order to source empty space necessary for the next operation.  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key while pressing the RECORD button.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SURE  
?
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Load Err > message  
This means that loading is impossible because there is an error  
in data applied to the DATA IN connector from the external  
DAT.  
<Protected> message  
This means the disk inserted in the drive cannot be used because  
it is write-protected. The disk will be ejected automatically.  
Action to take:  
Action to take:  
Check the external DAT connected to the DATA IN connector  
and be sure there is no problem with the DAT tape. Then, try  
loading again.  
Release the write-protect and re-insert it.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Before Starting  
This chapter describes some basic items that you need to know before you start operating the FD-4.  
All users, including those who are familiar with using tape-based multitrackers and those who are new to multitrackers,  
should read this chapter thoroughly to understand the functions of the FD-4.  
1. Time Base  
2. Recording method and REMAIN display  
3. Managing songs by Program Change function  
4. Real tracks and Additional tracks  
5. Input monitoring and playback monitoring  
6. PAN knobs and stereo bus  
Time Base  
The word “Time Base” appears frequently in this manual. The concept of Time Base is similar to a “tape counter” on a  
conventional tape-based multitracker in that it indicates the precise position of the recorder transport section (the current  
position).  
The FD-4 offers three types of Time Base: ABS (Absolute type), MTC (MIDI time code), and BAR/BEAT/CLK (bar/beat/clock).  
ABS indicates an absolute time on the disk. MTC indicates a relative time that is obtained by adding a certain value (MTC  
offset value) to the ABS value. BAR/BEAT/CLK indicates the position in a song created in the internal Tempo Map according  
to MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer. The following diagrams depict the relationship among these three types of the Time  
Base.  
ABS 0  
DISK END  
00M, 00S, 00F  
00M, 08S, 00F  
REC END  
23H, 59M, 59S  
ABS  
-002BAR, 1 , 00CLK  
001BAR, 1 , 00CLK  
BAR/BEAT/CLK  
BAR =001BAR, 0404  
TEMPO=001BAR, 1 , 60  
01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
00H, 59M, 59S  
01H, 00M, 08S, 00F  
MTC  
MTC OFFSET=01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
MTC OFFSET MODE=ABS  
(This shall be assumed to be the  
MTC OFFSET time set for the ABS  
00M, 00S and 00F positions.)  
00H, 59M, 51S  
00H, 59M, 52S, 00F  
01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
MTC  
MTC OFFSET=01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
MTC OFFSET MODE=BAR  
(This shall be assumed to be the MTC  
OFFSET time set for the 00 BAR, 1  
and 00 CLK positions.)  
Recorded area  
Non recorded area  
You can switch between these three types of Time Base to  
suit your purpose. (Refer to the explanation in “Display Sec-  
tion” on page 21 for more information on switching Time  
Base.)  
<Note>  
When BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected as Time Base, the po-  
sition forABS 0 (top of the disk) is always “- 2 BAR, 1 , 00  
CLK” and you cannot modify this value.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
If you wish to know how much you can record on four  
tracks, you need to divide the current REMAIN value by  
four.  
Recording method and REMAIN indicator  
Recording method  
The FD-4 uses a SCSI removable disk (such as an MO disk or  
Zip disk) instead of a cassette tape. You can start recording  
sound sources from any point on a formatted disk as long  
as the point is within the range of 24 hours in ABS time.  
(Refer to the following diagram.)  
Managing songs by Program Change function  
The FD-4 features Program Select function, which enables  
you to set up to 99 Programs on the disk.  
DISK END  
REC END  
03M 00S 00F  
23H, 59M, 59S  
ABS 0  
10M 00S 00F  
12M 00S 00F  
When you format a disk, one Program will be automatically  
created on the disk. You may create more Programs, if nec-  
essary. You may also delete unnecessary Programs.  
The FD-4 also features Program Change function that en-  
ables you to select one of the Programs set on the disk.  
Programs on the disk are something like independent con-  
tainers. You can record, play, and edit each container with-  
out affecting other containers.  
recorded area (3 min.) unrecorded area  
unrecorded area  
recorded area (2 min.)  
You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS Time.  
The area actually used on the disk  
recorded area (5 min.)  
unrecorded area  
Recordable disk area.  
You can also name Programs, which is useful for managing  
songs.  
For example, if you record three minutes of data starting  
from ABS 0 (top of the disk) as shown in the diagram, then  
record two minutes starting at the 10-minute point in ABS  
time, the recording end point is 12 minutes in ABS time.  
However, this does not mean that the entire recording du-  
ration is 12 minutes. The disk space actually used for re-  
cording is five minutes (3 minutes + 2 minutes). That is,  
the area between three minutes and ten minutes in terms  
of ABS time is still unrecorded.  
Program 2  
Program 5  
Program 8  
Program 3  
Program 6  
Program 9  
Program 1  
Program 4  
Program 7  
When you try to play or fast forward this unrecorded area,  
the time counter on the display will count, but the FD-4 will  
not access the disk. However, MTC will be output when you  
try to play this area.  
You can set up to 99 Programs (independent containers).  
Refer to page 36 for more information on the Program Select  
function.  
On the FD-4, the top of the disk is called “ABS 0” and the  
recording end point is called “REC END.”  
<Note>  
REMAIN indicator  
Total available recording time is always the maximum avail-  
able recording time on the disk, regardless of the number of  
Programs you set on the disk. That is, if you use up the  
maximum recording time for one Program, you will not be  
able to record any data in other Programs.  
The REMAIN indicator displays available recording time ex-  
pressed in time value or bar/beat/clock value, depending  
on the currently selected Time Base. It also indicates the  
available disk space.  
The REMAIN indicator displays the  
amount of unrecorded area.  
recorded area (5 min.)  
unrecorded area  
recordable disk area  
Right after you format the disk, the REMAIN indicator will  
show the maximum recordable time and space on the disk.  
The values will decrease as the actual recorded area ex-  
pands. The REMAIN value is calculated by deducting the  
time and space of all data on the Real tracks and Additional  
tracks from the original available recording time and space  
in mono-track base. That is, the value indicates available  
recording time and space if you record on one mono track.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Real track and Additional track  
Input monitoring and playback monitoring  
There are two methods for monitoring track sound (only  
on the Real tracks): input monitoring and playback moni-  
toring. They are defined as follows:  
The FD-4 features four Real tracks (1–4) and two Additional  
tracks (L and R), for a total of six tracks.  
Real tracks are used to record sound sources in real-time.  
Additional tracks are used to temporarily store the sound  
recorded in the Real tracks.  
Input monitoring  
This is useful since you can move data from Real tracks to  
Additional tracks to obtain empty tracks for recording.  
The Track Exchange function of the FD-4 handles this op-  
eration. This function allows you to swap data freely be-  
tween six mono tracks. You can also swap Real tracks 1–2  
or 3–4 with Additional tracks L and R.  
Input monitoring means to monitor via track output the  
recording signal sent to the Real tracks of the recorder.  
That is, you are monitoring a post-recorder signal, not a  
pre-recorder signal. The FD-4 enters input monitoring sta-  
tus when you perform one of the following operations.  
• When you set a track to recording mode  
Track R  
Track L  
To set a track to recording mode, press the RECORD TRACK  
select key to set the track READY, then press the PLAY button  
while holding down the RECORD button.  
You can also  
swapRealtracks  
1–2 or 3–4 with  
Additional tracks  
L and R.  
Additional tracks  
You can swap  
data between  
sixmonotracks.  
When recording starts on the READY track, the FD-4 auto  
matically enters input monitoring status.  
Track 4  
Track 3  
• When you set a track to recording stand-by mode  
To set a track to recording stand-by mode, press the RECORD  
TRACK select key to set the track READY, then press only the  
RECORDbutton. (PressingtheRECORDbuttonagainwillcause  
the FD-4 to enter playback monitoring mode.)  
Track 2  
Track 1  
Real tracks  
Under this condition, only the READY track enters input moni  
toring mode, on stand-by for recording.  
If the disk is formatted in Normal mode or Matering mode  
1, you can record to Additional tracks in real-time.  
This feature allows you to perform ping-pong recording  
from Real tracks 1–4 to Additional tracks L and R.  
Track 4: INPUT monitor, Tracks 1~3: REPRO monitor  
You cannot use this feature with a disk in Mastering mode  
2, although you can still use the Track Exchange function.  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Monitor  
<Note>  
INPUT  
section  
Track 2  
You cannot play back data on Additional tracks in all  
recording modes. If you wish to play data on an Addi-  
tional track, first use the Track Exchange function to  
move the data to a Real track.  
Track 1  
Playback monitoring  
<Note>  
“Playback monitoring” means to monitor the playback  
sound of the tracks (only Real tracks). That is, you are moni-  
toring the playback sound on the track, not the sound be-  
ing recorded to the track.  
Data on the Additional tracks also affects the RE-  
MAIN value. If Real tracks contain no data, butAddi-  
tional tracks contain data, the amount of the data  
(time and space) will be reflected in the REMAIN  
value.  
All tracks: REPRO monitor  
Track 4  
Refer to page 60 for more information on the Track Exchange  
function.  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
Monitor  
section  
Refer to page 51 for more information on the Ping-pong re-  
cording to additional track.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
PAN knobs and stereo bus  
The FD-4 features a four-channel mixer function that en-  
ables you to mix four sound sources into a stereo mix.  
Since the mixer functions and signal flow are not visible,  
the following diagram will help you understand them.  
The diagram shows the flow of signals from the inputs  
through the mixer section to the recorder.  
The thick line in the diagram is called the “stereo bus”,  
which collects the channel signals that are panned and pro-  
cessed by the EQ. The signals are adjusted for the final  
level by the master faders L/R, then routed to the STEREO  
OUT L/R jacks. The same signals are routed to the recorder  
(external SCSI disk) and recorded in the specified tracks.  
In this case, the PAN knobs function like a turn signal to  
stereo buses L and R. As shown in the diagram, rotating the  
PAN knob toward L will cause signals to be sent to stereo  
bus L. Rotating the PAN knob toward R will cause signals to  
be sent to the stereo bus R. Stereo bus L signals are then  
routed to Real tracks 1 and 3 and Additional track L.  
Stereo bus R signals are routed to Real tracks 2 and 4 and  
Additional track R. You can select a recording track using  
the RECORD TRACK select keys. (You can record to Addi-  
tional tracks in real-time only on the disk in Mastering mode  
1 or Normal mode.)  
For example, to record all sound sources input to channels  
1–4, turn all channel PAN knobs completely to L, and press  
the RECORD RACK select key 1/L to set the track READY.  
STEREO BUS L  
ST OUT L, R  
STEREO BUS R  
L
R
L
R
L
R
PAN knob  
1/L  
L
R
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
REC SEL switch  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Recording and Playback)  
Basic Recording and Playback  
This chapter explains how to perform basic recording and  
playback so that you can get used to operating the FD-4.  
This chapter will be helpful not only for those who are new  
to a multitracking, but also to those who are used to han-  
dling a tape-based multitracker to master the basic opera-  
tion of the FD-4.  
Recording one sound source to one track  
To get used to basic recording, record one sound source to  
one Real track. We will use electric guitar as the sound source  
in this example.  
After you master this basic chapter, proceed to the next  
“advanced” chapter to try multitrack recording using ad-  
vanced techniques.  
The explanations here assume that a SCSI drive is connected  
as described in the “Recording Preparation” chapter and  
the disk is formatted in “Normal” recording mode.  
Real track 4  
Real track 3  
Real track 2  
Real track 1  
<Note>  
You can record up to two tracks simultaneously. If you try to set more  
than two tracks to READY mode, [Track Over] appears on the display  
and recording mode will be canceled.  
* Initialize the FD-4 before recording.  
Setting the disk  
FD-4 initial settings  
1. Turn on the power to the FD-4 and the SCSI drive, and insert  
the disk.  
The FD-4 displays [Normal] (recording mode), then  
displays the start of ABS time (ABS 00M 00S 00F).  
Before you start operating the FD-4, or when you wish to  
proceed to the next step, you need to reset the knobs and  
switches on the FD-4. This is called “initializing the FD-4” in  
this document. Set the knob and switch settings to the fol-  
lowing positions. Always remember to “initialize the FD-4”  
before you proceed to the next step.  
2. Press the DISP SEL key to display the REMAIN indicator.  
The REMAIN indicator shows the available recording  
duration and free disk space for mono track recording.  
3. After you check the REMAIN time, press the DISP SEL key  
to display the ABS time.  
<Initial settings>  
1. Lower the input channel faders and master faders L/R.  
2. Set the LEVEL switch for channels 3 and 4 to H (–10dB).  
3. Set the knobs and switches to the center position or “0” position.  
4. Turn all the RECORD RACK select keys to OFF (SAFE).  
5. Set all control keys to off (LEDs will turn off).  
Connecting the guitar and the monitoring head-  
phones  
1
2
4
3
Point 3  
Point 4  
EQ  
EQ  
1. Connect the guitar to input jack 1, and connect the  
monitoring headphones to the PHONES jack.  
You can connect the guitar to any input jack.  
If you wish to connect a sound source that requires the  
adjustment of the input level, such as a microphone,  
connect it to input jack 3 or 4. The input jacks support  
either the mic level or line level, and have LEVEL switches  
that allow for input level adjustment.  
You can also use the balanced inputs (INPUTs 3 and 4) on  
the rear panel to connect a balanced output from the  
sound source (XLR connector).  
Point 2  
Point 1  
Point 5  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Recording and Playback)  
Monitoring the recording signal  
8
3
9
8. Turn the MON knob in the MON mix section of channel 1  
toward [TRK] and turn the MASTER knob in the monitor  
section to adjust the monitoring level  
EQ  
EQ  
Use the MON PAN knob in the MON mix section to adjust  
the stereo image of the monitoring sound.  
9. Adjust the equalizer for channel 1 if necessary.  
If equalizing changes the level and the [OL] section of the  
meter lights up, lower the level using the input channel 1  
fader.  
8
2
11  
<Using the SELECTOR switch while monitoring>  
* You can select the type of monitoring sound using the SELEC-  
TOR in the monitor section. Set the SELECTOR to [MON] to moni-  
tor the recording sound, and turn the MON knob in the MON mix  
section for the channel that corresponds to the real track toward  
[TRK]. Since we are now monitoring the track 1 recorder output,  
use the MON mix section of channel 1. At this time, by turning the  
MON knob toward [INPUT], you can monitor the pre-fader signal  
routed from the input jack (the signal that is unaffected by the input  
fader and equalizer).  
7
6 10  
5
4
1
Setting the switch and knob  
1. Set the channel 1 INPUT SEL switch to [INPUT].  
* If you set the SELECTOR to [L/R], you can monitor the signal  
routed to the recorder (the signal that is going to be recorded). Since  
the level of the monitoring sound changes with the input fader posi-  
tion, regardless of the MON mix section setting, you need to use the  
MASTER knob in the monitor section to adjust the monitoring level.  
The electric guitar signal is routed to the input channel 1  
fader. If you connect the instrument to another input  
jack, set the INPUT SEL switch of the corresponding  
channel to [INPUT].  
2. Turn the channel 1 PAN knob to [L] all the way.  
The electric guitar signal is routed to the stereo bus L.  
* If you set the SELECTOR to [L/R+MON], you can monitor both  
signals with the [MON] and [L/R] settings.  
3. Press the RECORD RACK select key [1/L] so that the [1/L]  
LED will flash.  
Starting recording  
Track 1 becomes READY mode.  
10. Press the PLAY button while holding down the RECORD  
button.  
Adjusting the recording level  
The flashing RECORD LED and the LED of the READY track  
remain lit, indicating that the track is now recording.  
At this time, the recording Real track is in input  
monitoring mode.  
4. Raise the master fader L/R to the [7–8] position.  
5. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [MON].  
6. Press the RECORD button.  
The RECORD LED flashes and track 1 enters input  
monitoring mode.  
Stopping recording  
In this mode, the electric guitar signal routed to track 1 is  
output through the recorder track 1 output.  
11. To stop recording, press the STOP button.  
<Note>  
7. While playing the guitar, raise the input channel 1 fader to  
[7–8], and adjust the recording level while checking the level  
meter 1.  
After you finish recording, press the STOP button immediately. If  
you keep recording silence, you will waste disk space.  
When you raise the input fader, the level meter L also  
moves. This meter indicates the output level of the  
stereo bus L.  
Adjust the input fader so that the level meter will  
occasionally reach the [0] point of the meter at  
maximum volume. (Make sure that the meter at the [OL]  
section will not light up.)  
Now you have recorded the guitar sound in Real track 1 via  
the input jack 1. We can use the same method to record  
other sound sources to other tracks.  
The next table shows guideline settings for track 2–4 re-  
cording. You can connect any sound sources to any input  
jacks.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Recording and Playback)  
Recording  
track  
INPUT SEL switch  
position  
Adjusting the monitor sound of  
the recording track  
REC TRACK select key  
for track READY  
Monitor section’s  
SELECTOR position  
PAN knob adjustment  
Use the channel 1 MON mix section to  
adjust the monitoring sound for track 1.  
Track 1  
1/L is READY.  
Turn all the way to L.  
Use the channel 2 MON mix section to  
adjust the monitoring sound for track 2.  
Turn all the way to R.  
Turn all the way to L.  
Track 2  
Track 3  
2/R is READY.  
3/L is READY.  
Set to MON  
Set to INPUT  
Use the channel 3 MON mix section to  
adjust the monitoring sound for track 3.  
Use the channel 4 MON mix section to  
adjust the monitoring sound for track 4.  
Turn all the way to R.  
4/R is READY.  
Track 4  
Undo/Redo recording  
You can undo or redo a real-time recording.  
• Press the UNDO/REDO key after recording is complete to restore  
the conditions that existed prior to the recording.  
• Press the UNDO/REDO key again to restore the conditions that  
existed after the recording.  
<Note>  
The Undo/Redo is effective only in the stop mode of the FD-4.  
Undo/Redo will not effective if the following is executed prior to carrying  
out UNDO/REDO.  
1. When a new recording made.  
2. When a new editing is executed.  
3. While in theAuto Punch On mode, when theAUTO PUNCH IN point  
is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
6. When the disk is ejected.  
Recording onto the additional track  
On a disk formatted in the [Normal mode] or the [Master-  
ing mode 1], real time recording is possible on the addi-  
tional track L and R.  
However, whenrealtimerecordingontotheadditionaltrack,  
unlike recording onto a real track, the additional track can-  
not be entered in the input monitor mode.  
As shown in the chart below, the stereo bus L, R output  
sound is directly monitored by switching the monitor sec-  
tion SELECTOR to [L/R].  
<Note>  
When recording is attempted on the additional track on a disk for-  
matted in “Mastering mode 2,” [Can’t Rec] will be displayed and the  
recording mode canceled.  
* When recording on the additional track, if the monitor section SE-  
LECTOR is set to [L/R] as shown in the chart below, the stereo bus L,  
R signal sound quality processed such as with an equalizer for ex-  
ample, can be monitored.  
Also, if the SELECTOR is switched to [MON], and MON knob of the  
channel to which the sound source is input is rotated to the [INPUT]  
side, the pre-fader signal can be monitored. In other words, signals  
which have not been affected by the INPUT fader and equalizer, can  
be monitored.  
Additional Track R  
Additional Track L  
Monitor section’s  
SELECTOR position  
Recording  
track  
INPUT SEL switch  
position  
Adjusting the monitor sound of  
the recording track  
REC TRACK select key  
for track READY  
PAN knob adjustment  
For the purpose of monitoring the stereo bus  
L output, the monitor sound is adjusted only  
with the monitor section MASTER knob.  
Track L  
Turn all the way to L.  
L is READY.  
Set to L/R  
Set to INPUT  
For the purpose of monitoring the stereo bus  
R output, the monitor sound is adjusted only  
with the monitor section MASTER knob.  
Track R  
Turn all the way to R.  
R is READY.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Recording and Playback)  
<Notes on playback>  
Checking the recording sound  
When tracks 1–4 are played, the track signals are routed to the  
MON mix section of the channels with the corresponding track num-  
bers. That is, track 1 signal is routed to channel 1 MON mix section,  
track 2 signal is routed to channel 2 MON mix section, etc.  
Tomonitorthetrackplaybacksound, usethecorrespondingchannel’s  
MON knob to adjust the level, and use the MON PAN knob to adjust  
the stereo image.  
Playing track 1  
When you finish recording, play back the data if the re-  
cording is acceptable.  
5
2
Real track 4  
Real track 3  
Real track 2  
Real track 1  
EQ  
EQ  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
0
0
0
0
5
INPUT  
TRK1  
MON  
INPUT  
TRK2  
INPUT  
TRK3  
INPUT  
TRK4  
M
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
MON  
L
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
1
Channel MON mix section  
You can also route the track playback sound to the input faders. To  
do so, set the INPUT SEL switch to TRK.  
Playback of the additional track sound  
3
4
<Notes in playback on the Additional track>  
1. Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP  
Sound recorded on the additional track cannot be played back in  
real time while it is located there. In order to playback the addi-  
tional track’s sound, the recorded data must be temporarily ex-  
changed with one of the real tracks. For explanations on mutually  
replacing tracks, please refer to “Track Exchange Function” on page  
60. The sound on the additional track exchanged to a real track  
can be played back using the same procedures explained in the  
left column.  
button.  
The FD-4 locates the beginning of the Program (ABS 0)  
(LOCATE ABS 0).  
2. Turn the RECORD TRACK select key off so that you will not  
record data accidentally.  
3. Leave the INPUT SEL switch and the SELECTOR in the  
monitor section as they are.  
<Undo/redo subsequent to exchange>  
Even after temporarily exchanging onto a real track, “undo/redo”  
can be executed for the purpose of checking the sound recorded  
on the additional track, in the same way as at real track recording.  
However, “undo/redo” subsequent to track exchange is permis-  
sible only once for each function. A second try will be ignored.  
4. Press the PLAY button to start playback.  
5. Turn the channel 1 MON knob toward [TRK], and gradually  
raise the MASTER knob in the monitor section. Use the MON  
PANknobtoadjustthestereoimageofthemonitoringsound.  
You can monitor the recorded sound on track 1.  
* If the UNDO/REDO key is pressed after checking the sound  
transferred to the real track, it can be returned to the state  
prior to recording onto the additional track.  
<Note>  
* If the UNDO/REDO key is pressed subsequent to executing  
UNDO, it can be returned to the state prior to exchange of the  
additional track and the real track.  
Do not raise the MASTER knob too high if you are monitoring through  
headphones for a long period of time.  
<Note>  
The Undo/Redo is effective only in the stop mode of the FD-4, the same  
as when recording onto a real track..  
Undo/Redo will not effective if the following is executed prior to carrying  
out UNDO/REDO.  
1. When a new recording made.  
2. When a new editing is executed.  
3. While in theAuto Punch On mode, when theAUTO PUNCH IN point  
is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
6. When the disk is ejected.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Multitrack Recording)  
Basic Multitrack Recording  
You learned how to record one sound source to one track  
in the “Basic Recording and Playback” chapter.  
This chapter explains how to perform multitrack record-  
ing, which is, of course, the primary application of a  
multitracker.  
Recording a drum machine to track 1  
Record the drum machine sound to track 1 as per to the  
“Basic Recording and Playback” chapter.  
Multitrack recording is the term for a series of processes in  
which you record various sound sources to different tracks  
and combine them into two mixes (L and R).  
This recording involves one important process called “over-  
dubbing,” in which you record an additional sound source  
to a different track while monitoring the input sound and  
listening to the already-recorded sound play back.  
Overdubbing the bass to track 2  
This step assumes that only one Program has been set up.  
If multiple Programs have already been set up, first select  
the desired Program. Do not select another Program until  
you finish a series of overdub operations.  
Refer to “Using the Program Change function” on page 37  
for more information on changing the Programs.  
As an example of the steps involved in overdubbing, we record the  
following instruments to tracks 1–4.  
* Initialize the FD-4.  
1. Record a drum machine to track 1.  
2. Record an electric bass to track 2 while listening to track 1  
playback.  
Connecting a sound source  
3. Record an electric guitar to track 3 while listening to tracks 1  
and 2 playback.  
4. Record the vocal to track 4 while listening to tracks 1–3  
playback.  
1
2
4
3
Track 1 -> Drum machine  
1. Connect the electric bass to input jack 1.  
You may connect the bass to any input jack.  
If you connect it to input jack 3 or 4, set the LEVEL switch  
to [H].  
Track 2 -> Electric Bass  
Track 1 -> Drum machine  
Setting the switch and knob  
3
8
8
EQ  
EQ  
Track 3 -> Electric Guitar  
Track 2 -> Electric Bass  
Track 1 -> Drum machine  
10  
2
13  
11  
Track 4 -> Vocal  
Track 3 -> Electric Guitar  
Track 2 -> Electric Bass  
7
9
Track 1 -> Drum machine  
4
6
1
5
12  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Multitrack Recording)  
1. Set the channel 1 INPUT SEL switch to [INPUT].  
2. Turn the channel 1 PAN knob all the way to [R].  
Listening to the overdubbed sound  
2
3. Press the RECORD RACK select key [2/R] to set track 2 to  
READY mode.  
The 2/R LED flashes.  
EQ  
EQ  
4. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [MON].  
Adjusting the recording level  
5. Raise the master fader L/R to [7–8].  
4
6. Press the RECORD button.  
The RECORD LED flashes, and the READY track 2 enters  
input monitoring mode.  
1
7. Raise the channel 1 input fader to [7–8] and play the bass.  
While observing level meter 2, use the input fader and  
equalizer to obtain the optimum tonal color and  
recording level.  
Monitoring the electric bass sound  
4
3
8. Use the channel 2 MON mix section to adjust the monitoring  
level of the electric bass sound.  
Turn the MON knob toward [TRK 2] and turn the  
MASTER knob in the monitor section.  
Use the MON PAN knob to adjust the stereo image of the  
monitoring sound.  
1. Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP  
button to locate the beginning of the Program.  
2. To avoid accidental recording, turn the RECORD TRACK  
select key 2/R off.  
3. Press the PLAY button to play back from the beginning.  
4. Adjust the playback sound of tracks 1 and 2 in the channels  
1 and 2 MON mix section.  
Practicing overdubbing  
Monitor the electric bass sound while listening to the play-  
back of the drum machine sound on track 1.  
The following table shows the switch settings for overdub-  
bing on tracks 3 and 4. (Refer to next page.)  
In this example session, we record the electric guitar to track  
3 and the vocal to track 4 in the same way as we over-  
dubbed track 2.  
9. Press the PLAY button to play the recorder.  
At this time, the LED of the READY track and the RECORD  
LED keep flashing.  
10. Use the channel 1 MON mix section to adjust the track 1  
playback sound.  
Play the electric bass while monitoring the drum machine  
sound on track 1.  
Undo/redo overdubbing  
You can monitor the drum machine sound (playback  
monitoring) and the electric bass sound (input  
monitoring) at the same time.  
Use the MON knobs and MON PAN knobs of channels 1  
and 2 to adjust the volume level and balance.  
At this stage, the bass sound is not recorded. Practice  
your performance until you are satisfied.  
You can undo or redo overdubbing.  
• Press the UNDO/REDO key after recording is completed to  
restore the conditions that existed prior to the overdubbing.  
• Press the UNDO/REDO key again to restore the conditions that  
existed after the overdubbing.  
<Note>  
The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-4 is stopped.  
The Undo/Redo is ineffective if you perform one of the following  
operations after you finish recording.  
Starting overdubbing  
11. Press the REWIND button while pressing the STOP button  
to locate the beginning of the Program.  
1. When a new recording is made.  
2. When a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move &  
Paste, Erase).  
3. While in theAUTO PUNCH ON mode, when theAUTO PUNCH  
IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
12. Press the PLAY button while pressing the RECORD  
button.  
Play the electric bass while listening to the drum machine  
sound on track 1.  
Quitting overdubbing  
6. When the disk is ejected.  
13. Press the STOP button to stop recording.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Multitrack Recording)  
Settings for overdubbing the electric guitar to track 3  
Monitor section’s  
SELECTOR  
position  
REC TRACK  
Adjusting the  
monitoring level of the  
recording track.  
INPUT SEL switch  
position  
PAN knob  
Adjusting the monitor level  
of track 1 and 2.  
INPUT jack  
select key for  
track READY  
adjustment  
Turn the knob of the  
channel to which the  
sound source is  
connected all the  
way to L.  
Use the MON mix section  
of channel 3 to adjust the  
monitoring level of the  
sound being recorded to  
track 3.  
Use the MON mix section of  
channels 1 and 2 to adjust  
the monitoring level of  
Set the switch of the  
channel to which the  
sound source is  
Any INPUT jack  
3/L  
Set to MON.  
tracks 1 and 2 respectively.  
connected to INPUT.  
Settings for overdubbing the vocal to track 4  
Monitor section’s  
SELECTOR  
position  
Adjusting the  
monitoring level of the  
recording track.  
REC TRACK  
PAN knob  
Adjusting the monitor level  
of track 1 and 2.  
INPUT SEL switch  
INPUT jack  
select key for  
track READY  
adjustment  
position  
Input jack 3 or 4  
(on the front  
Use the MON mix section  
of channel 4 to adjust the  
monitoring level of the  
sound being recorded to  
track 4.  
Turn the knob of the  
channel to which the  
sound source is  
connected all the  
way to R.  
Use the MON mix section of  
channels 1, 2 and 3 to adjust  
the monitoring level of  
Set the switch of the  
channel to which the  
sound source is  
panel or the rear  
panel), with the  
LEVEL switch  
set to [L]  
Set to MON.  
4/R  
tracks 1, 2 and 3 respectively.  
connected to INPUT.  
Connecting external devices  
Mixdown  
Mixdown is the final process in multitrack recording, in  
which you combine multiple recorded track data into ste-  
reo L and R (2 mixes) and copy (dub) to the master re-  
corder.  
Effect unit (Chorus)  
2
You can apply effects to the recordings on tracks 1–4 via  
Aux send/return, equalize the signals, and adjust the over-  
all volume level and stereo image before mixdown.  
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
Track 4  
Track 3  
Master  
Mix  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
SCSI  
Recorder  
Track 2  
Track 1  
To output signals for mixdown (stereo bus L/R output), the  
FD-4 is equipped with DATA OUT jacks that output digital  
signals (S/P DIF format), as well as the STEREO OUT L/R  
jacks for analog output.  
Effect unit (Reverb)  
1
3
This makes it possible to perform high-quality digital  
mixdown without tonal deterioration onto an external DAT  
machine with optical inputs.  
Master Recorder  
Refer to “Advanced Operation” for more information on  
digitalmixdownandothermixesusingadvancedtechniques.  
1. Connect the input and output jacks of the reverb unit to the  
AUX SEND1 and AUX RTN1 of the FD-4 respectively.  
• Initialize the FD-4.  
• Use two effect units, reverb and chorus, for effects.  
2. Connect the input and output jacks of the chorus unit to the  
AUX SEND2 and AUX RTN2 of the FD-4 respectively.  
3. Connect the input jacks of the master recorder (DAT or  
analog recorder) to the STEREO OUT L/R of the FD-4.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Application (Basic Multitrack Recording)  
Turn the knob toward [AUX 1] to apply reverberation;  
turn it toward [AUX 2] to apply chorus.  
5, 12  
Effect unit 1  
Effect unit 2  
Master Recorder  
10. Use the AUX RTN 1 and AUX RTN 2 knobs to adjust the  
input level from the effect units to the stereo bus L/R.  
10  
Mixdown  
9
EQ  
EQ  
11. Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP  
button to locate the beginning of the Program.  
7
12. Start recording on the master recorder.  
Adjust the input level on the master recorder so that its  
level meters indicate almost the same level as the FD-4’s  
level meters L/R.  
2
1
11  
13. Press the FD-4’s PLAY button to play the Program from the  
beginning.  
7
Operate the master faders L/R to fade the mixdown sound  
in and out.  
3
Quitting mixdown  
14  
4, 8  
6, 13  
14. Stop the master recorder and the FD-4.  
Setting the switch and knob on the FD-4  
1. Set the INPUT SEL switches of channels 1–4 to [TRK].  
In this way, the output from recorded tracks 1–4 will be  
routed to the corresponding input channel faders for  
equalization and effect processing.  
2. Set the channel PAN knobs accordingly.  
There is no rule on the position of the PAN knobs.  
The settings would differ depending on the type of the  
instrument you recorded or the feel of your song.  
You can, for example, pan a given instrument to the left  
and the vocal to right. Follow your intuition.  
3. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [L/R].  
4. Raise the master fader L/R to [7–8].  
Settingtheoutputlevelandthemasterrecorder  
5. Set the master recorder to recording standby mode.  
You should be able to check the recording level.  
6. Press the PLAY button to play back the Program from the  
beginning.  
7. Raise the channel faders and turn the MASTER knob in the  
monitor section gradually to monitor the sound.  
Use the channel faders to adjust the track playback levels  
while monitoring the sound.  
At this time, check the level meters L and R and adjust  
the faders so that the [OL] section of the meter will not  
light up with the maximum level.  
8. When you obtain a satisfactory balance, use the master  
fader L/R to adjust the final output level.  
Also adjust the input level on the master recorder.  
Settings for the effect units  
9. Turn theAUX knob for the channel signal to which you wish  
to apply effects toward [AUX 1] or [AUX 2].  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
Handling Programs  
3. While holding down the HOLD/> key, press the STORE key.  
(Alternatively, while holding down the STORE key, press the  
HOLD/> key.)  
This chapter explains how to handle Programs.  
It covers the following topics:  
[Select PGM] appears on the display briefly, then changes  
to a flashing “01” ([#0001 of PGM 01) and [SURE?] flash.  
([#0001] is the default name of PGM 01.)  
1. Creating a new Program  
2. Using a Program Change function  
3. Deleting a Program  
4. Editing a Program title  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Creating a new Program  
You can manage individual songs by setting multiple Pro-  
grams on the disk as explained in the “Managing songs by  
Program Change function” section of the “Before Starting”  
chapter. You can create up to 99 Programs can be created  
as long as the disk space allows.  
4. Turn the JOG dial clockwise.  
The question marks “?” of [New PGM ?] and [SURE?] flash.  
This indication asks you if you wish to set a new Program  
(Program 2).  
When you format a disk, one Program will be automatically  
created. Follow the steps below to create a new Program (in  
addition to the Program created on the disk during the  
format operation).  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
1
1
The FD-4 automatically enters [Title Edit ?] menu in SETUP  
mode. You can enter a title for Program 2. ([t] and [?]  
flash alternately.)  
SETUP  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
PGM  
ADD. TRACK  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
2
SCSI  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
3
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
5, 6, 7  
4
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P.  
EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
0
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
A default title (#0002) appears on the display, with “#”  
and [SURE?] flashing. This means that you can enter a  
name for the new Program.  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
If you prefer the default name, press the EXECUTE/YES  
key again. If you wish to name the Program with a unique  
title, continue the steps below. In either case, you can  
change the title later, as explained in “Editing a Program  
title.”  
1. Turn on the power to the FD-4 and a connected SCSI drive.  
2. Insert a formatted disk into the SCSI drive.  
The FD-4 displays [Initial..], [(SCSI drive name and ID  
number)], [(Recording mode, such as [Normal])], then  
the top of ABS Time Base (ABS 0).  
To enter a title:  
Turning the JOG dial will enter a character or number at the  
location of the flashing cursor. You can enter up to 16 characters,  
nine of which will appear on the display.  
The current Program is [PGM 01]. [#0001] is the default  
name of PGM 01.  
To move the flashing cursor, press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND  
button, or the F FWD button. The F FWD button is the most  
convenient.  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
• You can enter the following characters and numbers:  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
Using the Program Change function  
If multiple Programs exist on the disk, you need to select a  
Program to record, play, or edit. This section describes  
how to select a Program.  
<Note>  
YoucannotusetheProgramChangefunctionwhentheFD-4isinSETUP  
mode.  
7. When you finish entering the title, press the EXECUTE/YES  
key.  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
ADD. TRACK  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
Program 2 (PGM 02) and its title are set.  
The display shows the ABS Time Base indication of the  
Program.  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
3
2
1
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P.  
EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
0
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
<Important!>  
• When you create a new Program by selecting the [New PGM  
?] menu, a new Program is created with an increment  
number.  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
That is, if only one Program exists and when you create a  
new Program, it will be named Program 2.  
If Programs 1–5 already exist, a new Program number will be  
6.  
1. When the FD-4 is stopped, press the STORE key while  
holding down the HOLD/> key. (Or press the HOLD/> key  
while holding down the STORE key.)  
• If there is insufficient recording space on the disk, you cannot  
create the new Program. Each time you create a new  
Program, the recordable area on the disk will decrease.  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select the desired Program number  
(flashing).  
Rotating the JOG dial counter-clockwise decreases the  
number, and rotating it clockwise increases the number.  
If you turn the JOG dial clockwise all the way, [New PGM  
?] will be selected.  
Select [New PGM ?] to create a new Program as mentioned  
in the previous section “Creating a new Program.”  
For example, you can select one of seven Programs as  
follows:  
PGM 01  
New PGM  
PGM 03 PGM 04 PGM 05 PGM 06 PGM 07  
PGM 02  
You can select from PGM 03 up to New  
PGM in this direction.  
You can select up to PGM  
01 in this direction.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The ABS Time Base indication for the selected Program  
appears.  
In this way, you can be sure to select a Program before  
you start working.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
1. Press the SETUP key while the FD-4 is stopped.  
The FD-4 enters SETUP mode, and displays the first  
hierarchy of the SETUP menu that was displayed before  
youturned off the power.  
Deleting a Program  
This section explains how to delete an unnecessary  
Program.  
The default setting is [Sign. Set ?] menu (setting a time  
signature).  
Deleting an unnecessary Program will expand the record-  
able area, making your work flow more smoothly, since  
recording or editing requires sufficient recordable area (free  
space on the disk). Use the [Del. PGM ?] menu in SETUP  
mode to delete a Program.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Notes on deleting a Program>  
You can delete only the currently-selected Program. Refer to  
the previous section, “Using a Program Change function,” for  
information on how to select the desired Program before you  
proceed to delete the Program.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select the first hierarchy of the [Del.  
PGM ?] (deleting a Program) menu.  
Alternatively, you can use the HOLD/> key, the REWIND  
button, or the F FWD button.  
• If only one Program exists and you try to delete it, data  
contained in the Program will be deleted, but the Program itself  
will remain.  
SETUP  
For example, assume that PGM 01 –07 exist and you try to  
delete PGM 05. Program number 05 will remain, but the data  
inside PGM 05 will be replaced with the data of PGM 06.  
The subsequent Programs’ data will move in the same way.  
Therefore, it will appear that PGM 07 has been deleted.  
If you delete the last Program (PGM 07 in this example), PGM  
07 will be completely deleted.  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The number of the Program to be deleted appears and  
[SURE ?] flashes.  
PGM 05  
PGM 02 PGM 03 PGM 04  
PGM 06 PGM 07  
PGM 01  
If you try to delete PGM 05, only the data of  
PGM 05 will be deleted and the data of PGM  
06 will move into PGM 05.  
SETUP  
After deleted  
PGM  
PGM 05  
PGM 02 PGM 03 PGM 04  
PGM 06  
PGM 01  
SURE ?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
• You cannot use the Undo/Redo function to delete Programs.  
Make sure that you delete the correct Program.  
To cancel the delete operation, press the EXIT/NO key while [SURE ?]  
is flashing. Each time you press the button or key, the FD-4 will return to  
a higher level in the hierarchy, and finally exit SETUP mode.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
When the FD-4 displays [Deleting...] and finishes  
deleting the Program, the data of the next Program  
number moves in, and its ABS time appears.  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
1
ADD. TRACK  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
To check the REMAIN time and free space, press the DISP SEL key  
to display the [REMAIN] indication after the Program is deleted.  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
3, 4  
2
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Editing a Program title  
The currently-selected Program title appears with the left-  
most character flashing.  
You can name the Program as explained in the “Creating a  
new Program” section. You can also change the title later  
by using the [Title Edit ?] menu in SETUP mode.  
SETUP  
<Note>  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
You can edit the title of the selected Program before you select  
SETUP mode. You cannot select a Program after the FD-4  
enters SETUP mode. Be sure to select the desired Program  
using the steps explained in the “Using the Program Change  
function” section.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
4. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to move the flashing cursor, and use the JOG dial to  
enter characters or numbers.  
To move the flashing cursor, press the HOLD/> key, the  
REWIND button, or the F FWD button. The F FWD button  
is the most convenient.  
You can enter up to 16 characters, nine of which will  
appear on the display.  
RECORD TRACK  
You may enter the following characters and numbers:  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
R
1
ADD. TRACK  
PREVIEW  
OUT  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
START  
IN  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
PGM SEL  
ELECT  
4
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
3, 5  
1, 4  
JOG SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P. EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
STOP PLAY  
0
AUTO  
PUNCH  
RECORD  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
4
1. Press the SETUP key while the FD-4 is stopped.  
The FD-4 enters SETUP mode and displays the first  
hierarchy level of the SETUP menu that was selected  
before you turned off the power.  
5. After you enter the title, press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The new title is confirmed, and the ABS time value of the  
Program appears.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select the first hierarchy level of the  
[Title Edit ?] (title edit) menu.  
The currently-selected Program number also appears.  
You can also use the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or  
the F FWD button to select the first hierarchy level  
display.  
SETUP  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Playback in Vari pitch mode)  
Playback in Vari Pitch Mode  
4. Set the desired pitch data using the JOG dial.  
This chapter explains how to change the playback speed of  
the recorder using the Vari Pitch function. You can set Vari  
Pitch in the range of +6.0% to –6.0% in 0.1% steps.  
The VARI PITCH key turns Vari Pitch mode on and off.  
You can hear the changes in playback speed.  
5. After you set the pitch data, press the EXIT/NO key.  
The FD-4 exits from Vari Pitch data edit mode and  
continues playing with the Vari Pitch you just set.  
2, 6, 7  
6. To turn off Vari Pitch mode, press the VARI PITCH key. (The  
[VARI PITCH] indicator turns off.)  
Vari Pitch mode is cancelled, and the FD-4 resumes  
playback at normal speed.  
EQ  
EQ  
7. If you wish to play back data at the current Vari Pitch again,  
press the VARI PITCH key to turn the mode on.  
5
4
You can turn the Vari Pitch function on and off and edit the  
pitch data while the FD-4 is playing or stopped, but not  
during recording.  
However, if the Vari Pitch function has already been turned  
on and the pitch data was specified before you start  
recording, the FD-4 will record using the current Vari Pitch.  
<Note>  
Even if the pitch data is 0.0% (no speed change), pressing the  
VARI PITCH key will turn on the [VARI PITCH] indicator on the  
display. In other words, the [VARI PITCH] display indicates that the  
Vari Pitch function is turned on.  
3 1  
1. Press the PLAY button to play the FD-4.  
2. Press the VARI PITCH key.  
<Note>  
The [VARI PITCH] indicator lights up on the display,  
indicating that Vari Pitch mode is turned on.  
The Vari Pitch function is automatically turned off and the [VARI  
PITCH] indicator is turned off under the following conditions:  
You have turned on the power to the FD-4. (The pitch data will  
be reset to 0.0%.)  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SCSI  
VARI PITCH  
You have set “Slave mode setting” in SETUP mode to ON. (The  
pitch data previously set will be maintained.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
YouhavespecifiedatrackforDigitalinputtracksettinginSETUP  
mode, and [DIGITAL] lights up on the display. (The pitch data  
previously set is retained.)  
VARI PITCH lights up to indicate Vari  
Pitch mode is turned on.  
3. Press the VARI PITCH key again while holding down the  
SHIFT key.  
The FD-4 enters Vari Pitch data edit mode, and the  
current pitch data flashes on the display.  
The current pitch data flashes.  
ABS  
M
S
%
.
VARI PITCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Recording to a Metronome Sound)  
Recording to a Metronome Sound  
This chapter explains how to record your performance while  
Setting the switch and knob  
you are playing an instrument accompanied by a metro-  
nome based on the time signature and tempo specified in  
Compressor/limiter  
the Tempo Map. The metronome sound is output from track  
4
2
4.  
For example, record the acoustic guitar using a microphone  
to track 2 while using a compressor/limiter.  
EQ  
EQ  
• Initialize the FD-4 before the operation.  
• If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired Program.  
Connecting a sound source and a effect unit  
5
3
1
2
4
3
6
1
1. Set channel 3 LEVEL switch to [L].  
2. Set channel 3 INPUT SEL switch to [INPUT].  
3. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [MON].  
4. Set the RECORD TRACK select key 2/R to READY.  
5. Turn channel 3 PAN knob all the way to R.  
6. Raise the master fader L/R to [7–8].  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
R
MONO/L  
If the microphone has a bal-  
anced (XLR) connector, use  
INPUT 3 (XLR) jack on the  
rear panel.  
Creating a Tempo Map  
1. Set the time signature using the “Setting a time signature”  
menu in SETUP mode.  
Refer to the “Setting a time signature” section on page  
82.  
Compressor/limiter  
1. Connect a microphone to input jack 3.  
If the microphone has a balanced (XLR) connector, use  
INPUT 3 (XLR) jack on the rear panel.  
2. Set a tempo for a given point using the “Setting a tempo” in  
SETUP mode.  
Refer to the “Setting a tempo” section on page 83.  
2. Connect a compressor/limiter to INSERT jack 3 on the rear  
panel.  
The compressor/limiter will be applied to channel 3  
signal.  
Turning the Metronome function on  
1. Turn the Metronome function on using the “Setting the  
Metronome function” menu in SETUP mode.  
Refer to the “Setting the Metronome function” section on  
page 85.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Recording to a Metronome Sound)  
11. Play the guitar in time with the metronome.  
The guitar sound is recorded at the recording level  
adjusted in step 6.  
8
3
3
Quitting recording  
EQ  
EQ  
1. Press the STOP button to stop the recorder.  
Checking the recorded sound  
1. Set the RECORD TRACK select key 2/R to off.  
2. Lower channel 3 input fader.  
1
10  
9
3. Locate the top of the Program and start playback.  
4. Turn the channel 2 MON knob to the left to check the  
recorded guitar sound.  
Since the Metronome function still remains on, you can  
hear the metronome sound during playback as you turn  
the channel 4 MON knob.  
2
4
6
Checking the metronome sound  
<Note>  
When you finish using the Metronome function, turn the function off  
in SETUP mode.  
1. Select the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base using the TIME BASE  
SEL switch.  
<Note>  
2. Start playback from the beginning of the Program.  
Even if the selected Program does not have any recorded  
data, track 4 outputs the metronome sound and the FD-4  
counts time.  
When the Metronome function is on, you cannot record data on  
track 4, nor can you play data recorded on track 4.  
3. Turn the MON knob of channel 4 MON mix section toward  
TRK, and turn the MASTER knob in the monitor section  
gradually.  
If you wish to re-record the sound, use the Undo/Redo function to  
re-start recording as explained in the “Basic Recording and Play-  
back” chapter.  
You will hear the metronome output from track 4 using  
the tempo and time signature set in the Tempo Map.  
Monitoring the guitar sound and adjusting the  
recording level  
4. Press the RECORD button.  
Track 2 enters input monitoring mode.  
5. Play the guitar.  
6. Adjust the recording level of the guitar sound using the  
channel 3 input fader.  
As you raise the input fader, level meter 2 will respond.  
7. Adjust the output level on the compressor/limiter.  
8. Adjust the guitar monitoring level using the channel 2 MON  
mix section.  
Use the channel 2 MON knob to adjust the level, and use  
the MON PAN knob to adjust the stereo image.  
Starting recording  
9. Locate the top of the Program.  
10. Hold down the RECORD button and press the PLAY  
button to start recording.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Punch In/Out Recording)  
Punch In/Out Recording  
Auto Punch In/Out  
What is Punch In/Out recording?  
To perform Auto Punch In/Out recording, you need to  
specify the Auto Punch In point (recording start point) and  
the Auto Punch Out point (recording end point).  
Punch In/Out recording enables you to record over previ-  
ously-recorded parts. See the diagram below. For example,  
using the Punch In/Out function allows you to change an  
unsatisfactory guitar solo.  
The FD-4 offers two types of Punch In/Out functions. One  
is called Auto Punch In/Out, in which you automatically re-  
record a specified part. The other is called Manual Punch  
In/Out, in which you record data manually (using your  
foot to operate an optional foot switch, model 8051).  
Both functions feature “Rehearsal mode” to enable you to  
practice repeatedly until you are ready.  
Storing the edit points  
1. Refer to “Storing the edit points” on page 63 to set theAuto  
Punch In/Out points.  
Store the Auto Punch In point to the AUTO PUNCH IN  
key, and the Auto Punch Out point to the AUTO PUNCH  
OUT key.  
• Refer to page 63 for more information on storing the edit points.  
Punch Out point  
Punch In point  
Auto Punch In point  
(Strat point)  
Auto Punch Out point  
(End point)  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
This part is changed.  
This part is changed.  
• Select a Program for Punch In/Out recording.  
• Initialize the FD-4.  
<Note>  
Make sure that you specify anAuto Punch In point that precedes the  
Auto Punch Out point. If theAuto Punch Out point precedes theAuto  
Punch In point, [Void Out !] appears and you will be unable to per-  
form Auto Punch In/Out recording.  
<Note>  
You can use the Punch In/Out recording only for Real tracks 1–4.  
If you wish to use Punch In/Out recording for data on an Additional  
track, first move the data to the Real tracks.  
Previewing and trimming the edit points  
You can check the stored edit points by pressing the corre-  
sponding memory keys to display them on the LCD. You  
can also change the points if necessary.  
In this example, use the Preview function to fine-tune the  
point while previewing.  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, hold down the SHIFT key and  
press the memory key.  
Pressing the AUTO PUNCH IN key enables you to listen to  
the sound at the AUTO PUNCH IN point (“previewing the  
sound rise [fade-out]”). Pressing the AUTO PUNCH OUT  
key enables you to listen to the sound at the AUTO PUNCH  
OUT point (“previewing the sound fall [fade-in]”).  
2. Trim the edit point while auditioning the sound.  
• Refer to page 69 for more information on the Preview function.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Punch In/Out Recording)  
When you finish storing and adjusting the edit points, you  
can proceed to the Auto Punch In/Out operation.  
In this example, we re-record part of the guitar phrase that  
was already recorded on track 3. First follow the “Prepara-  
tion” below, then rehearse, and record a take.  
Rehearsing Auto Punch In/Out recording  
In Rehearsal mode, the READY track assumes input moni-  
toring mode between the Auto Punch In and Out points,  
and the sound is not recorded. You can practice Auto Punch  
In/Out operation repeatedly before you proceed to actual  
recording.  
Preparation  
Locate the recording start position slightly before the Auto  
Punch In point.  
<Tips for rehearsal>  
Set the preroll value while referring to the “Changing the Initial Set-  
tings (SETUP Mode)” chapter. In this way, the FD-4 can locate a  
point that precedes the Auto Punch In point by the specified preroll  
value. This enables you to start playback slightly before the Punch  
In point. (Refer to page 85 for more information on “Changing the  
Initial Settings.”)  
The FD-4 will repeat playback data between theAUTO RTN START  
pointandtheAUTORTNENDpointifyousettheAUTORTNSTART  
point before the Auto Punch In point and the AUTO RTN END point  
after the Auto Punch Out point. This allows you to repeat rehearsal.  
See the “Hints” on page 45.  
EQ  
EQ  
2-D  
2-F  
2-E  
2-C  
2-A  
2-G  
1. Press the RECORD button while holding down the SHIFT key.  
The [RHSL] indicator flashes in the A.PUNCH mode  
indication area of the display. This means that Auto Punch  
mode is turned on.  
2-H  
2-B  
1
2. Set the track for Auto Punch In/Out to READY.  
Press the RECORD RACK select key [3/L] to set track 3 to  
READY.  
3. Start playback on the FD-4 from a point slightly before the  
Auto Punch In point.  
Connecting the instrument  
Rehearsal starts, and the FD-4 operates as follows:  
1. Connect the guitar to input jack 1.  
Auto Punch Out point  
(Rehearsal out)  
Playback  
end point  
Playback  
start point  
Auto Punch In point  
(Rehearsal in)  
Microphones and some instruments require an input level  
adjustment.  
Connect these to input jacks 3 and 4 (unbalanced jacks  
on the front panel or balanced connectors on the rear  
panel) that are equipped with the LEVEL switches.  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
This part is changed.  
Only track 3 in input  
monitoring.  
The sound is not recorded at  
this time.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
Setting the mixer section  
2. Set up the mixer section as follows:  
The RECORD LED flashes.  
Channel 1 -> [INPUT]  
INPUT SEL switch  
A
Channel 2 -> [OFF]  
Channel 1 -> as you wish  
Channel 2~4 -> [0]  
The FD-4 punches in  
automatically at the  
Punch In point.  
The FD-4 punches out  
automatically at the  
Punch Out point.  
B
C
D
Input fader  
Channel 1 PAN knob  
MON knob  
[L] (Turn all the way to left.)  
Channel 1~4 -> Turn toward [TRK].  
Adjust the track monitor level.  
The LED of the REC TRACK select key 3/L remains flashing.  
4. Playtheguitaraccompanyingtheplaybacksoundfromtracks  
1 and 2 for rehearsal, while adjusting the recording level.  
You will hear the guitar performance between the Auto  
Punch In and Out points. Otherwise, you will hear the  
recorded guitar sound.  
Use the channel 1 input fader to adjust the recording  
level of the guitar. Turn the channel MON knobs toward  
[TRK] to adjust the playback level of tracks 1–3.  
Channel 1~4 -> Adjust for easier monitoring.  
Adjust for easier monitoring.  
E
F
MON PAN knob  
MON MASTER knob  
MON SELECTOR  
Master fader L/R  
Switch to [MON]  
Raise up to [7~8].  
G
H
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Punch In/Out Recording)  
5. When you are satisfied with your rehearsal, press the STOP  
button.  
Auto Punch In/Out Take  
After you are satisfied with your rehearsal, you can pro-  
ceed to an actual take of Auto Punch In/Out. You can undo  
or redo Auto Punch In/Out recording if you change your  
mind.  
<Hint 1>  
LocatingapointslightlybeforetheAutoPunchInpoint  
To locate the playback start point for rehearsal, press the AUTO  
PUNCH IN key, then press the LOCATE key.  
• The control panel settings are the same as those for rehearsal.  
The FD-4 displays the time (position) stored in the AUTO PUNCH  
IN key, and locates the point and stops.  
1. Locate a point slightly before the Auto Punch In point.  
Press the REWIND button to go backward. If you have set the preroll  
time as described on page 85, you can locate a point that precedes  
the Auto Punch In point by the specified preroll value. For more  
information, see “Setting a preroll time” on page 85.  
2. Confirm that Auto Punch mode is turned on.  
If it is not on, press the RECORD button while holding  
down the SHIFT key.  
Auto Punch Out point  
Auto Punch In point  
Stop here.  
3. Press the RECORD TRACK select key [3/L] to set track 3 to  
READY.  
4. Press the RECORD button while holding down the PLAY  
button.  
The flashing [RHSL] on the display changes to an  
illuminated [TAKE], and recording starts.  
The FD-4 operates as follows. To record, hold down the  
PLAY button and press the RECORD button.  
Locate  
Locate  
The FD-4 stops at a point that precedes the Auto  
Punch In point by the specified preroll time. (0~10  
seconds)  
Auto Punch Out point  
(Rehearsal out)  
Playback  
end point  
Playback  
start point  
Auto Punch In point  
(Rehearsal in)  
<Hint 2>  
Quick and easy operation for repeated rehearsal  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
Using the Auto Return function and the Auto Play function enables  
you to rehearse repeatedly.  
As shown below, set the AUTO RTN START and END points for  
Auto Return and Auto Play. In this way, you can repeat rehearsal  
easily, while checking the recording level and concentrating on your  
performance.  
This part is changed.  
Only track 3 is in input  
monitoring mode, and data  
will be recorded.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
Refer to page 63 for more information on setting the AUTO RTN  
START/END points.  
The Record button LED  
flashes in this area.  
Auto Punch Out point  
AUTO RTN END point  
Auto Punch In point  
AUTO RTN START point  
The FD-4 punches in  
automatically at the  
Punch In point.  
The FD-4 punches out  
automatically at the  
Punch Out point.  
Rehearsal area  
• The LED of the REC RACK select key 3/L remains steadily lit  
between the Punch In and Out points. Otherwise, it flashes.  
Playback starts from the AUTO RTN START point,  
and you can rehearse Auto Punch In/Out.  
• When the Auto Punch Out point is passed, the FD-4 cancels  
Auto Punch mode automatically, and nothing appears in the  
A. PUNCH display area.  
When theAUTO RTN END point is reached, the FD-4 locates  
the AUTO RTN START point.  
5. Hold down the PLAY button and press the RECORD button.  
6. When you finish recording, press the STOP button.  
<Note>  
If the FD-4 display [Over] when you turn on Auto Punch mode, the  
disk does not have enough free space for Auto Punch In/Out. You  
need to erase part of the Program data, then try again.  
7. Play track 3 to check the result of the Auto Punch In/Out  
operation.  
<Caution after Punch Out>  
At “Take” of punch out, the punch-in recording track will not immedi-  
ately enter the repro monitor mode from the input monitor mode  
enter the repro monitor mode about two seconds after mute play-  
back. This is a functional feature of FD-4 and not a malfunction.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Punch In/Out Recording)  
Undo/Redo Auto Punch In/Out recording  
Manual Punch In/Out  
You can undo or redo Auto Punch In/Out recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key after recording is complete to  
restore the conditions that existed prior to the recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key again to restore the conditions  
that existed after the recording. Follow the notes below:  
This section explains how to perform Manual Punch In/  
Out using a foot switch (optional Model 8051).  
You do not need to specify the Punch In/Out points.  
Instead, you press the foot switch at the Punch In/Out point.  
Manual Punch In/Out also offers rehearsal and actual takes.  
You can repeat rehearsal until you are ready.  
As an example, replace a part of the recorded guitar solo on  
track 3.  
<Note-1>  
The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-4 is stopped.  
<Note-2>  
• Initialize the FD-4.  
The Undo/Redo is not effective if you perform one of the following  
operations after you finish recording:  
• Select a desired Program for Punch In/Out.  
• When a new recording is made.  
Preparation  
• While a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move &  
Paste, or Erase).  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
• When in theAUTO PUNCH ON mode, when theAUTO PUNCH  
IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
• When the power is momentarily switched off.  
• When the program is changed.  
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
MIX OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
POWER  
SCSI  
R
• When the disk is ejected.  
2
EQ  
EQ  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
Connecting the instrument and a foot switch  
1. Connect the guitar to input jack 1.  
2. Connect an optional foot switch (Model 8051) to the PUNCH  
IN/OUT jack on the rear panel.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Punch In/Out Recording)  
Setting the mixer section.  
Cancelling Rehearsal mode  
3. Set up the mixer control section as explained in the “Auto  
Punch In/Out” section.  
1. While holding down the STOPbutton, press the foot switch.  
[Rehsl Off] appears for a second, the flashing [RHSL]  
indicator in the A. PUNCH display area disappears, and  
Rehearsal mode is cancelled.  
Rehearsing Punch In/Out recording  
<Hint>  
To rehearse repeatedly, set the AUTO RTN START point slightly  
before the Punch In point, and the AUTO RTN END point slightly  
before the Punch Out point.  
This will help you concentrate on your performance or check the  
recording level easily (especially since Manual Punch In/Out in-  
volves operating the foot switch operation as well as the FD-4).  
(See <Hint-2> in the “Rehearsing Auto Punch In/Out recording” for  
more information.)  
In Rehearsal mode, the READY track enters input monitor-  
ing mode between the Punch In and Out points (the points  
at which you press the foot switch), and the sound is not  
recorded. You can practice the Punch In/Out operation re-  
peatedly before you proceed to actual recording.  
1. Press the foot switch while holding down the STOP button.  
The FD-4 displays [Rehsl On] for a second and enters  
Rehearsal mode.  
[RHSL] flashes in the A.PUNCH display area.  
Manual Punch In/Out take  
2. Press the RECORD TRACK select key [3/L] to set track 3 to  
READY.  
You can proceed to record if you are satisfied with the re-  
cording level, foot switch timing, and rehearsal.  
3. Press the PLAY button to play back from a point slightly  
before the Punch In point.  
<Note>  
You cannot record a second take during the Manual Punch In/Out  
operation without stopping the FD-4. That is, the FD-4 will continue  
playing after you finish recording a take, but you cannot record an-  
other take by pressing the foot switch.  
4. Play the guitar accompanying the playback of tracks 1 and 2.  
Follow the instructions in the “Auto Punch In/Out”  
section to adjust the recording level and the monitor level.  
5. Press the foot switch once at the desired Punch In point,  
then press the foot switch again at the desired Punch Out  
point.  
The FD-4 operates as follows. You will hear your  
performance between the Punch In/Out points.  
Otherwise, you will hear the previously-recorded guitar.  
1. Confirm that Rehearsal mode is cancelled, and start playing  
the FD-4 from a point slightly before the desired Punch In  
point.  
2. Play the guitar, accompanying the playback of tracks 1 and 2.  
3. Press the foot switch at the desired Punch In point. Press  
the foot switch again at the desired Punch Out point.  
The FD-4 will operate as follows. The FD-4 enters  
recording mode at the Punch In point, and cancels  
recording mode at the Punch Out point.  
Punch Out point  
(Rehearsal out)  
Playback  
end point  
Playback  
start point  
Punch In point  
(Rehearsal in)  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
This part is changed.  
Punch Out point  
(Take out)  
Playback  
end point  
Playback  
start point  
Punch In point  
(Take in)  
Only track 3 is in input  
monitoring mode.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
The sound is not recorded at  
this time.  
The Record button LED  
flashes in this area.  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
This part is changed.  
Only track 3 is in input  
monitoring mode, and data  
will be recorded.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
Press the foot switch at  
the Punch In point.  
Press the foot switch at  
the Punch Out point.  
6. When you finish rehearsing, press the STOP button.  
If you are still unsatisfied, repeat steps 3–5.  
Press the foot switch at  
the Punch In point.  
Press the foot switch at  
the Punch Out point.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Punch In/Out Recording)  
4. Press the STOP button.  
5. Play track 3 and check the result of Punch In/Out.  
<Caution after Punch Out>  
At “Take” of punch out, the punch-in recording track will not immedi-  
ately enter the repro monitor mode from the input monitor mode  
enter the repro monitor mode about two seconds after mute play-  
back. This is a functional feature of FD-4 and not a malfunction.  
<Hint>  
You can use the PLAYbutton and the RECORD button, instead of  
using the foot switch. Follow the steps below.  
This method also does not allow you to record another take un-  
less you stop the FD-4 first.  
Procedure:  
1.Press the PLAY button to start playback from a point slightly  
before the Punch In point.  
2.Press the RECORD button while holding down the PLAY  
button at the desired Punch In point. (Punch In recording starts.)  
3.Press the PLAY button at the desired Punch Out point.  
(Recording is punched out.)  
• If you press only the RECORD button in both steps 2 and 3,  
you can rehearse Punch In/Out.  
Undo/Redo Manual Punch In/Out recording  
You can undo or redo Manual Punch In/Out recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key after recording is complete to  
restore the conditions that existed prior to the recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key again to restore the conditions  
that existed after the recording. Follow the notes below:  
<Note-1>  
TheUndo/RedofunctioniseffectiveonlywhentheFD-4isstopped.  
<Note-2>  
The Undo/Redo is ineffective if you perform one of the following  
operations after you finish recording.  
• When a new recording is made.  
• While a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move  
& Paste, or Erase).  
• WhenintheAUTOPUNCHONmode, whentheAUTOPUNCH  
IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
• When the power is momentarily switched off.  
• When the program is changed.  
• When the disk is ejected.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Ping Pong Recording)  
Ping-Pong Recording  
Ping-pong recording is a recording process in which you  
mix the playback sound of multiple tracks and record the  
mix on an empty track. Ping-pong recording enables you to  
use previously-recorded tracks in a new recording.  
In this way, you can overdub more sound sources using a  
limited number of tracks.  
Effect Unit  
1
5
11  
12  
4
11  
10  
EQ  
EQ  
<Example of ping-pong recording>  
3. Record D and E  
on tracks 1 and 2.  
2. Ping pong record  
on track 4.  
1. Record A, B and  
C on tracks 1~3.  
Sound source A,B,C  
TRK 4  
TRK 3  
Sound source A,B,C  
TRK 4  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 3  
Sound source C  
Sound source B  
3
2
13  
TRK 2 Sound source E  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 1  
Sound source D  
Sound source A  
5. Record F and G  
tracks 1 and 2.  
4. Ping pong record  
D and E on track 3.  
TRK 4  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 3  
Sound source A,B,C  
Sound source D,E  
Sound source A,B,C  
8
7
14  
6
Sound source D,E  
Sound source G  
9
TRK 2  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 1  
Sound source F  
Connecting effect units  
Result: a total of 7 recorded parts A~D.  
1. Connect effect units to Aux send/return.  
In this example session, ping-pong record the sound sources  
recorded on tracks 1–3 to track 4. At this time, apply effects  
to tracks 1–3 signals.  
Setting the switch and knob  
2. Set the channels 1–3 INPUT SEL switches to TRK.  
Tracks 1–3 playback signals are routed to the  
corresponding input channel faders.  
TRK 4  
Ping pong recording  
TRK 3  
(Original sound and  
effected sound)  
Sound source C  
Sound source B  
Sound source A  
3. Turn the channels 1–3 PAN knobs all the way to [R].  
TRK 2  
TRK 1  
4. Set the monitor SELECTOR to L/R.  
You can monitor the stereo bus L/R output signals.  
5. Press the RECORD TRACK select key 4/R to set track 4 to  
READY.  
• Initialize the FD-4.  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
6. Raise the master fader L/R to 7–8.  
Adjusting the recording level/rehearsal  
7. Press the RECORD button to set track 4 to input monitoring  
mode.  
8. Start playing the Program from the beginning.  
9. Use the channels 1–3 input faders to adjust the track output  
levels.  
The level meters 4 and R respond. Tracks 1–3 level meters  
indicate the corresponding track output levels.  
10. Adjust the channel equalizers, if necessary.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Ping Pong Recording)  
11.Turn the AUX knob of the channel signal to which you wish  
to apply effects toward AUX 1. Use the AUX RTN 1 knob to  
adjust the return signal level.  
Now you have applied effects to tracks 1–3, mixed them,  
and recorded to track 4.  
After this ping-pong recording, you can erase data on tracks  
1–3 and overdub other sound sources.  
At this time, make sure that the [OL] section of level meters  
4 and R do not light up continuously.  
In this way, you can record numerous sound sources with a  
limited number of tracks.  
12. Raise the MASTER knob in the monitor section gradually  
to listen to the mix to be ping-pong recorded.  
When you finish adjusting the level, effects, and balance,  
stop the recorder section and locate the top of the  
Program.  
You can also use the Additional tracks of the FD-4 for ping-  
pong recording (excluding disks formatted in Mastering  
mode 2).  
Refer to the next page for more information on ping-pong  
recording on the Additional tracks.  
Performing ping-pong recording  
13. Hold down the RECORD button and press the PLAYbutton  
to start recording.  
Quitting ping-pong recording  
14. Stop the recorder section, and initialize the FD-4.  
Checking the ping-pong recording results  
1. Set the monitor SELECTOR to MON.  
2. Play the Program from the beginning.  
3. Turn the channel 4 MON knob toward [TRK] and turn the  
MASTER knob in the monitor section gradually to audition  
the sound on track 4.  
If the result is not satisfactory, you can undo/redo the  
recording as described below.  
Undo/Redo ping-pong recording  
You can undo or redo ping-pong recording.  
• Press the UNDO/REDO key after ping-pong recording is complete to  
restore the conditions that existed prior to the recording.  
• Press the UNDO/REDO key again to restore the conditions that  
existed after the recording.  
When you perform Undo or Redo, [Undo !] or [Redo !], then  
[COMPLETED !] appear, and the FD-4 displays the previous  
Time Base.  
<Note>  
The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-4 is stopped.  
The Undo/Redo is ineffective if you perform one of the following  
operations after you finish ping-pong recording.  
1. When a new recording is made.  
2. When a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move &  
Paste, Erase).  
3. While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when the AUTO PUNCH  
IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
6. When the disk is ejected.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Ping Pong Recording)  
Ping-pong Recording to Additional Tracks  
At this time, check the recording level of the Additional  
tracks via the level meters L and R. Adjust the input  
channel faders so that the [OL] section of the level meters  
L and R will not light up continuously.  
This chapter explains how to perform ping-pong recording  
using Additional tracks L and R.  
In this example session, we ping-pong record tracks 1–4 to  
the Additional tracks.  
8. Adjust the channel equalizers, if necessary.  
ADD. TRK R  
9. Turn the AUX knob of the channel signal to which you wish  
to apply effects toward AUX 1. Use the AUX RTN 1 knob to  
adjust the return signal level.  
ADD. TRK L  
Ping pong recording  
Sound source D  
TRK 3 Sound source C  
Sound source B  
TRK 4  
(Original sound and  
effected sound)  
At this time, make sure that the [OL] section of level meters  
4 and R do not light up continuously.  
TRK 2  
TRK 1 Sound source A  
10. Raise the MASTER knob in the monitor section gradually  
to listen to the mix sound to be ping-pong recorded.  
When you finish adjusting the level, effects, and balance,  
stop the recorder section and locate the top of the  
Program.  
<Notes>  
* This function is available only when you are using a disk  
formatted in Normal mode or Mastering mode 1.  
You cannot use a disk formatted in Mastering mode 2, which  
allows for normal ping-pong recording.  
Performing ping-pong recording  
11. Holding down the RECORD button and press the PLAY  
button to start recording.  
* You cannot play back data recorded onAdditional tracks. To play  
back the data, move it to Real tracks 1–2 or 3–4.  
Quitting ping-pong recording  
12. Stop the recorder section, and initialize the FD-4.  
• Initialize the FD-4 before you start the operation.  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
Checking the result of ping-pong recording  
Because any sound that has been ping ponged onto the  
additional track cannot be checked directly, the additional  
track and a real track must be temporarily exchanged.  
Connecting effect units  
1. Connect effect units to Aux sends/returns.  
1. Use the Track Exchange function to swap data between the  
Additional and Real tracks.  
Setting the switch and knob  
• See “Track Exchange” on page 60 for more information on moving  
data between tracks.  
1. Set the channel 1–4 INPUT SEL switches to TRK.  
Tracks 1–4 playback signals are routed to the  
corresponding input channel faders.  
2. Set the monitor SELECTOR to MON.  
3. Play the Program from the beginning.  
2. Turn the channel 1–4 PAN knobs all the way [L] or [R]  
depending on the sound sources so that they will be  
recorded to Additional tracks L and R.  
4. Turn the MON knob of the channel (to which you moved the  
data) toward [TRK] and turn the MASTER knob in the  
monitor section gradually to audition the sound.  
3. Set the monitor SELECTOR to L/R.  
You can monitor the stereo bus L/R output signals.  
Afterexchangingtheadditionaltrackwiththerealtrackandcheck-  
ing it. UNDO/REDO can be executed in the same way as with  
the previous “ping pong recording” if you are not satisfied after  
checking it.  
4. Press the RECORD TRACK select keys L and R.  
5. Raise the master fader L/R to 7–8.  
Adjusting the recording level/rehearsal  
If UNDO is executed after checking the sound, it can be re-  
turned to the state prior to executing ping pong.  
6. Start playing the Program from the beginning.  
Since Additional tracks cannot be set to input  
monitoring mode, you do not have to press the RECORD  
button at this time.  
If REDO is executed after execution of UNDO, it can be re-  
turned to the state prior to the second execution of UNDO (The  
state upon moving to the real track).  
7. Use the channel 1–4 input faders to adjust the track output  
levels.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Digital Recording)  
Digital Recording  
Selecting a Program to record  
Digital recording from an external digital device  
1. If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired Program  
using the Program Change function.  
This chapter describes how to digitally record data from a  
connected digital device (CD, MD, DAT, etc.) to tracks on  
the FD-4.  
• See page 36 for more information on Program Change.  
Use the “Setting digital input tracks” menu in SETUP mode  
to assign incoming digital signals (L, R) to a track.  
The currently-selected Program will be used for digital re-  
cording. The digital input track assignment is shared by all  
existing Programs.  
Setting a recording track  
2. SelectthedesiredtrackusingtheSettingdigitalinputtracks”  
menu in SETUP mode.  
When a track is assigned and a correct digital signal is  
input, the FD-4 displays [DIGITAL] on the display.  
If incoming digital signal is abnormal, the [DIGITAL]  
indicator flashes. Refer to “Setting digital input tracks” in  
the “Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” chapter  
on page 91.  
<Note>  
The “Setting digital input tracks” menu has Real tracks 1–4 and  
Additional tracks L (indicated as 5) and R (indicated as 6) as op-  
tions. However, you can record digital data toAdditional tracks if the  
disk’s recording mode is Normal or Mastering 1. If the disk is format-  
ted in Mastering mode 2, you cannot record data on the Additional  
tracks. If you try to record data on the Additional tracks using the  
disk in Mastering mode 2, an error message [Can’t Rec!] appears  
and the operation is ignored.  
<Caution>  
Do not connect or disconnect an optical cable to or from the DATAIN  
jack of the FD-4 while a track is assigned as digital input. Otherwise,  
noise may be induced to the FD-4, affecting the connected digital  
device.  
<Note>  
When you are using a disk in Normal mode, input a digital source  
with a sampling rate of 32kHz. When you are using a disk in Mas-  
tering mode 1 or Mastering mode 2, input a digital source with a  
sampling rate of 44.1kHz.  
When you finish setting the parameters in SETUP mode,  
be sure to press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP key to exit  
SETUP mode.  
3. Press the RECORD RACK select key of the assigned track  
to set the track to READY.  
Starting and quitting recording  
Connecting an external digital device  
1. Locate the top of the Program.  
1. Connect the DATAIN jack of the FD-4 with the OPTICALOUT  
jack of an external digital device using an optical cable.  
If the digital device has only the COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack  
as a digital output, use a Fostex COP-1 (an optional  
optical/coaxial converter).  
2. Make sure that [DIGITAL] lights up on the display. Hold down  
the RECORD button and press the PLAY button to start  
recording on the FD-4.  
3. Start playback on the external digital device.  
You do not need to adjust the recording level during  
digitalrecording. Ifyouarerecordingdataononeoftracks  
1–4, set the monitor SELECTOR to [MON] so that you can  
monitor the recorded signal via the MON mix section of  
the channel that corresponds to the track.  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
POWER  
SCSI  
R
You cannot monitor the signal while you are recording  
data on an Additional track.  
DATA IN  
4. When recording is complete, stop the FD-4 and the digital  
device.  
OPTICAL OUT  
<Note>  
While a track is assigned for digital input, you cannot use the same  
track for analog recording via the corresponding input jack. When  
you finish digital recording, set the “Setting digital input tracks” menu  
to [L-, r-] (no assign).  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Digital Recording)  
which enables you to perform digital mixdown as  
described later.  
Digital recording to an external device  
Refer to “Setting digital output tracks” in the “Changing  
the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” chapter on page 92 for  
more information on setting a digital output track.  
This section explains how to record digital data from the  
FD-4 to an external digital device, such as an MD, DAT, or  
CD-R.  
You can select any pair combination from Real tracks 1–4  
and S-T (STEREO OUT L/R output in the mixer section) for  
digital output L and R.  
The current Program is used for digital recording.  
The digital output track assignment is shared by all exist-  
ing Programs.  
<Note>  
You cannot assign the same track to L and R.  
When you finish setting the parameters in SETUP mode, be sure to  
press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP key to exit SETUP mode.  
Starting and quitting recording  
<Note>  
When you are using a disk in Normal mode, digital signal will be  
output with a sampling rate of 32kHz. When you are using a disk in  
Mastering mode 1 or Mastering mode 2, digital signal will be output  
with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz.  
1. Locate the top of the Program.  
2. Start recording on the external digital device.  
3. Press the PLAY button on the FD-4 to start playback.  
Digital data is output from the selected track and recorded  
on the external digital device.  
<Note>  
You cannot output data on the Additional tracks as it is. You need to  
move the data to the Real tracks using the Track Exchange function.  
4. When recording is complete, stop the FD-4 and the digital  
device.  
Connecting an external digital device  
1. Connect the DATA OUT jack of the FD-4 with the OPTICAL  
IN jack of an external digital device using an optical cable.  
If the digital device has only the COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack  
as a digital output, use an optional COP-1 (optical -  
coaxial converter).  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
POWER  
SCSI  
R
DATA OUT  
OPTICAL IN  
Selecting a Program to record  
1. If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired Program  
using the Program Change function.  
Setting a digital output track  
2. Select the desired track using the “Setting digital output  
tracks” menu in SETUP mode.  
If you assign [L- , r- ] (STEREO OUT L and R), the  
STEREO OUT L/R output of the FD-4 will have priority,  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Application (Digital Recording)  
and the vocal to right. Follow your intuition.  
3. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [L/R].  
4. Raise the master fader L/R to [7–8].  
Digital mixdown  
As described in the previous section, you may mix down  
digital signals from tracks 1–4 to an external digital device  
using the procedure described in the basic mixdown sec-  
tion, in which you set [L- , r- ] for digital output tracks.  
Refer to the “Basic Multitrack Recording” chapter for infor-  
mation on how to connect effect units.  
Settingtheoutputlevelandthemasterrecorder  
5. Set the master recorder to recording standby mode.  
You should be able to check the recording level.  
<Note>  
6. Press the PLAY button to play back the Program from the  
beginning.  
When you are using a disk in Normal mode, digital signal will be  
output with a sampling rate of 32kHz. When you are using a disk in  
Mastering mode 1 or Mastering mode 2, digital signal will be output  
with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz.  
7. Raise the channel faders and gradually turn the MASTER  
knob in the monitor section to monitor the sound.  
Use the channel faders to adjust the track playback levels  
while monitoring the sound. At this time, check the level  
meters L and R and adjust the faders so that the [OL]  
section of the meter will not light up with the maximum  
level.  
5, 12  
Effect unit 1  
DAT  
Effect unit 2  
10  
8. When you obtain a satisfactory balance, use the master  
fader L/R to adjust the final output level.  
EQ  
EQ  
9
Also adjust the input level on the master recorder.  
7
Settings for the effect units  
2
1
9. Turn theAUX knob for the channel signal to which you wish  
to apply effects toward [AUX 1] or [AUX 2].  
11  
Turn the knob toward [AUX 1] to apply reverberation;  
turn it toward [AUX 2] to apply chorus.  
7
10. Use the AUX RTN 1 and AUX RTN 2 knobs to adjust the  
input level from the effect units to the stereo bus L/R.  
3
14  
4, 8  
6, 13  
Mixdown  
11. Hold down the STOPbutton and press the REWIND button  
to locate the beginning of the Program.  
Connecting an external digital device  
1. Connect the DATA OUT jack of the FD-4 with the OPTICAL  
IN jack of an external digital device using an optical cable.  
12. Start recording on the master recorder.  
Adjust the input level on the master recorder so that its  
level meters indicate almost the same level as the FD-4’s  
level meters L/R.  
Assigning output tracks  
2. Use the “Setting digital output tracks” menu in SETUP mode  
to select [L- , R- ] as output tracks.  
Refer to “Setting digital output tracks” of the “Changing  
the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” chapter.  
13. Press the FD-4’s PLAY button to play the Program from the  
beginning.  
Operate the master faders L/R to fade the mixdown sound  
in and out.  
Setting the switch and knob on the FD-4  
Quitting mixdown  
1. Set the INPUT SEL switches of channels 1–4 to [TRK].  
In this way, the output from recorded tracks 1–4 will be  
routed to the corresponding input channel faders for  
equalization and effect processing.  
14. Stop the master recorder and the FD-4.  
2. Set the channel PAN knobs accordingly.  
There is no rule on the position of the PAN knobs.  
The settings will vary depending on the type of  
instrument you recorded or the feel of your song.  
You can, for example, pan a given instrument to the left  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Å@Special Application (How to use the RECORDER IN jack)  
How to use the RECORDER IN jack  
The following explains the various functions of the RE-  
Direct recording of an external sound source  
CORDER IN jack.  
There are two ways to use the RECORDER IN jack.  
Here, an external sound source is directly input to the RECORDER  
IN jack of the FD-4 and recorded in the recorder section without  
passing through a mixer.  
1. SynchronizinganexternalMIDIsoundsourcewiththeperformances  
recorded on tracks 1 ~ 4 and digitally mixing down a maximum of  
eight channels of sound sources.  
In this case, if an external input is connected to L and R of the  
RECORDER IN jack, it will not be possible to record through the  
mixer section.  
2. Directly recording external sound sources without routing them  
through a mixer.  
In the illustration below, the signal input to L of RECORDER IN is  
sent to tracks 1, 3 and L, and the signal input to R of RECORDER IN  
is sent to tracks 2, 4 and R. Any two tracks are selected for record-  
ing. If the connection is made from the mixer group out, using a  
patch bay will faciliate connections from the front panel as shown  
in drawing below. The recording level is adjusted at the external  
equipment side and, by setting the monitor section SELECTOR to  
[MON] at the FD-4 side, sound can be monitored using the MON  
mix section of the channel corresponding to each track. Recording  
onto the additional track is possible only in the normal mode and  
mastering mode 1.  
Eight channels of digital mixdown  
In this method, the RECORDER IN (L, R) jacks of the FD-4 are  
directly connected to the MON OUT (L, R) jacks and the moni-  
tor SELECTOR switched to [L/R+MON]. Then, the monitor bus  
L, R signal and the stereo bus L, R signals are both simulta-  
neously output from MON OUT L, R and input to RECORDER IN  
L, R. As shown in the drawing below, an external MIDI sound  
source is input to INPUT jacks 1~4, and then each channel  
INPUT fader is raised, and performances recorded on tracks  
1~4 are applied to each channel MON mix section, and played  
back using MIDI sync of both performances. With this method,  
a maximum of eight channels (Tracks 1~4 and MIDI sound) of  
sound sources are mixed and sent to the RECORDER IN L, R  
from MON OUT L, R, and digitally mixed down in an outboard  
digital device (DAT).  
RECORDER IN  
L
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
L
Real track 1  
Real track 2  
Real track 3  
Real track 4  
R
Additional track L  
Additional track R  
Recorder section  
R
REC SEL switch  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
R
MONO/L  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
R
MONO/L  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
POWER  
SCSI  
R
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
POWER  
SCSI  
R
Patch bay  
External mixer etc.  
DAT  
DAT  
<More applications for using RECORDER IN>  
If an external sound source is connected to both L and R of RECORDER IN,  
recording cannot be done via the INPUT fader. If only one jack (L or R) is con-  
nected, the track corresponding to the jack not connected can be recorded simul-  
taneously via the INPUT fader. For example, if sound source E is connected to  
only L of RECORDER IN, another sound source applied via the INPUT fader can  
be recorded on any one of tracks, 2, 4, R corresponding to R of RECORDER IN to  
which nothing is connected. In other words, because the FD-4 can simultaneously  
record two tracks, a sound source from RECORDER IN can be recorded on one  
track and sound source routed via the INPUT fader can be simultaneously re-  
corded on the other track.  
EQ  
EQ  
MIDI  
Sequencer  
Sound source E  
EQ  
EQ  
MIDI sound sources  
Track 2 (sound source E)  
Track 1 (sound sources A, B, C and D)  
For details on digital mixdown by synchronizing with a MIDI sound  
source, please refer to “MIDI clock sync system” of “MIDI synchro-  
nization” on page 71.  
Sound source D  
Sound source A Sound source B Sound source C  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Editing Tracks  
The FD-4 features speedy, non-linear, non-destructive ed-  
iting of independent audio tracks and uses a Zip, EZ or MO  
disk as the recording media.  
The following edit functions enable you to edit tracks. Press  
the EDIT key on the control panel to access the edit menu.  
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste  
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste might seem like the same  
function. However, they are different, as shown in the dia-  
gram. Remember this difference when you start using these  
functions.  
<Edit functions>  
Copy & Paste  
• Copy & Paste  
Using the Copy & Paste function enables you to copy a specific range of  
data from a specific track to the clipboard as shown below (this is called  
[Copy Clip] operation on the FD-4), then paste the data at a specific  
point in a specific track. The number of copy source tracks and the  
number of destination tracks are the same. That is, if you copy mono  
track data, you can paste it to a mono track. If you copy adjacent odd/  
even tracks (e.g., track 1 and track 2), you can paste it to adjacent odd/  
even tracks. The data on the clipboard remains as it is. You can paste it  
as many times as you wish.  
You can copy a specific range of data from a specific track and  
paste it to the same or a different track.  
Move & Paste  
You can move a specific range of data from a specific track and  
paste it to the same or a different track.  
CLIPBOARD OUT point  
CLIPBOARD IN point  
Copy source track  
Erase  
Copy Clip  
Paste  
You can erase a specific range of data from a specific track or  
from all tracks.  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
Paste destination track  
Track Exchange  
• Move & Paste  
Move & Paste is almost the same as Copy & Paste. It allows you to  
move a specific range of data from a specific track to the clipboard (this  
is called [Move Clip] on the FD-4), and paste it to a destination track.  
The difference from Copy & Paste is that the data on the source track  
and the clipboard will be erased when you paste the data to the destina-  
tion.  
You can swap data between tracks.  
Monaural track data can be swapped between Real tracks 1–4  
and Additional tracks L/R. Two-track data can be swapped be-  
tween Real tracks 1–2, 3–4, and Additional tracks L–R.  
CLIPBOARD OUT point  
CLIPBOARD IN point  
<Note>  
Move source track  
Move Clip  
Paste  
These edit functions are available for the currently-selected Pro-  
gram. If the disk contains multiple Programs, you need to select  
the desired Program first to perform the track edit operation.  
Do not select another Program until you finish the edit operation.  
Otherwise, you may lose or incorrectly edit another Program.  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
Paste destination track  
Follow the steps below to perform the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste  
operation.  
Store the copy (move) start point (CLIPBOARD IN point), end  
point (CLIPBOARD OUT point), and the paste start point (AUTO  
PUNCH IN point).  
CheckthestorededitpointsusingthePreviewfunctionandmake  
adjustments if necessary.  
Specify the copy (or move) source track, and copy (or move)  
the data to the clipboard.  
Specify the destination track and the number of times for the  
paste operation (repeated paste), and execute the paste opera-  
tion.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Storing the edit points  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
1. Refer to the “Storing and editing the locate points to the  
memory keys” section for information on storing the copy  
(or move) start and end points, and the paste start point.  
Store the copy (or move) start point to the CLIPBOARD IN  
key, the end point to the CLIPBOARD OUT key, and store  
the paste start point to the AUTO PUNCH IN key.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Note>  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key without selecting a track in Step 1  
will cause the display to indicate an alarm message [Select TRK !].  
Select a track, then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
• See “Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys” on  
page 63  
Now the sound data to be pasted has been copied (or  
moved) to the clipboard, you can check the data on the  
clipboard by following the steps below. If there is no  
problem with the data, you can proceed to the paste  
operation.  
.
Checking and adjusting the edit points  
After you store the edit points, you can check them on the  
display by pressing the corresponding keys. You may also  
adjust the points. This section explains how to preview and  
fine-tune the edit points using the Preview function.  
Checking the clipboard data  
* Hold down the STOP button and press the PLAY button.  
The FD-4 indicates whether the sound data on the  
clipboard is a copied data or moved data ([Copy Clip] or  
[Move Clip]) and plays the data (this is called clipboard  
playback). To listen to the clipboard playback, rotate the  
channel 1 MON knob toward [TRK] and raise the  
MASTER knob in the monitor section.  
1. While the recorder section is stopped, press and hold down  
the SHIFT key and press the memory key for which you wish  
to check the edit point.  
You can preview “fade in” at the CLIPBOARD IN point,  
“fade out” at the CLIPBOARD OUT point, and “fade out”  
at AUTO PUNCH IN point.  
2. Trim the edit point while previewing.  
* Press the EDIT key again to get ready for the paste operation.  
[Copy Paste] or [Move Paste] flashes on the display.  
• Refer to “Preview Function” on page 69 for more information.  
Executing Paste  
Executing Copy (or Move)  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the copy (or move)  
source track to set it READY.  
Select from mono tracks or adjacent odd-even tracks (1–  
2, 3–4, L–R).  
The display indication enables you to set the number of  
the paste operations. The number and [SURE ?] flash.  
At this time, the flashing RECORD TRACK select key LED  
becomes continuously lit.  
<Note>  
If you select non-adjacent tracks, such as tracks 1 and 3, or tracks 1,  
2, and 4, the copied (or moved) data will be pasted back to the copy  
(or move) source tracks.  
SURE?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Press the EDIT key repeatedly until [Copy Clip (or [Move  
Clip]) flashes on the display.  
Select [Copy Clip] to execute Copy & Paste.  
Select [Move Clip] to execute Move & Paste.  
5. Select a destination track to paste data.  
All selected tracks’ LEDs light up.  
You can select only mono tracks as the destination of a  
copied or moved mono track. If you copied or moved  
adjacent odd-even tracks, you can select only adjacent  
odd-even tracks as the destination.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
If you do not select any tracks, the data will be pasted  
back to the copy or move source track.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
6. Turn the JOG dial to enter the number of repeats (Repeat=**).  
You can enter up to 99. However, this is automatically  
limited by the available recording space on the disk.  
That is, if the disk has enough free space, you can set up  
to 99 repeats. If the disk has only a small amount of free  
space, the JOG dial allows you to set a lower number of  
repeats.  
The copy or move operation will complete immediately.  
The display briefly indicates [COMPLETED !], then flashes  
the [Copy Paste] message (or the [Move Paste] message).  
The FD-4 enters standby mode for the paste operation.  
The LEDs of the selected RECORD TRACK select keys  
continue to flash.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Erase  
[Copy Paste] (or [Move Paste]) flashes and the duration  
of the pasted data appears as a negative number on the  
display. This number will count down as the paste  
operation proceeds.  
There are two methods for erasing data. Understand the  
difference between these methods before you use the Erase  
function.  
When the paste operation is complete, the flashing [Copy  
Paste] (or [Move Paste]) lights up continuously, and  
[COMPLETED !] is displayed.  
* If multiple Programs are set on the disk, first select the desired  
Program. Do not select another Program until you finish the erase  
operation.  
<Note>  
• Erasing a specified part of the data between ABS 0 and  
REC END  
You may erase a specified part of the data betweenABS 0 and REC  
END (the end point of the recording) in the currently-selected Pro-  
gram. (The erased part is replaced with silence.)  
If you try to execute the paste operation by pressing the EXECUTE/  
YES key when the disk has insufficient free space, [Over !] appears  
on the display and edit mode is cancelled. In this case, you need to  
delete unnecessary data or Programs. Refer to the following sec-  
tion, “Erase,” and to “Erasing a Program” on page 38 for more infor-  
mation on erasing.  
You can erase data on a mono track and multiple tracks (including  
Real tracks and Additional tracks).  
As shown below, the REC END point (the end point of recording) is  
not affected. The erased area is replaced with silence. As a result,  
the REMAIN time and space will increase. (You will have more re-  
cordable space on the disk.)  
8. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
The FD-4 exits edit mode and displays the previous Time  
Base indication.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
9. TurnofftheRECORDTRACKselectkeyofthecopy(ormove)  
source track.  
Any track  
Erase  
Silence  
Any track  
REC END  
Undo/Redo Paste  
ABS 0  
• Erasing data from a specified point to REC END  
You may erase all data in the range from a specified point to REC  
END in the currently-selected Program. You can erase data on a  
mono track and multiple tracks (including Real tracks andAdditional  
tracks). When you erase all the tracks’ data, the REC END point will  
move backward. However, if you erase data on a mono track or  
multiple tracks (but not all tracks), the REC END point may not be  
affected. (Refer to the note below.) After the erase operation, the  
REMAIN time and space will increase.  
You can undo or redo a Copy & Paste and Move & Paste  
operation.  
To restore the data that existed prior to the paste operation, press  
the UNDO/REDO key.  
To restore the pasted data after you undo the paste operation,  
press the UNDO/REDO key again.  
<Note>  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-4 is stopped.  
Any track  
<Note>  
Erase  
Silence  
If you perform one of the following operations after you use the  
Copy & Paste or Move and Paste operation, the Undo/Redo func-  
tion will no longer be effective.  
Any track  
REC END  
ABS 0  
1. When a new recording is made.  
<Note>  
2. When a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move &  
Paste, Erase).  
The REC END point is the end point for recording on the Real tracks.  
The Erase function uses the REC END point on the Real tracks,  
even if the recording end point on an Additional track is located later.  
If all tracks contain data as shown below, you need to specify the  
recording end point of the Additional track (or later point) as an erase  
end point in order to erase the data from the specified point. You  
need to move the Additional track data to a Real track to find out  
where the REC END point is.  
3. While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when the AUTO PUNCH  
IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
6. When the disk is ejected. Erase  
Additional  
track  
Real track  
ABS 0  
Real track REC END  
Additional track REC END  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Storing the edit points  
<Note>  
If all Real tracks contain data as shown below, erasing data on  
tracks 1 and 2 will not affect the position of REC END.  
1. Refer to the “Storing and editing the locate points to the  
memory keys” section for information on storing the erase  
start and end points.  
Store the erase start point to the CLIPBOARD IN key, and  
the end point to the CLIPBOARD OUT key.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
(REC END)  
4
3
2
1
Real track  
Real track  
• If you wish to erase the data from a specific point, store the REC  
END or later point as the erase end point. Refer to the note above  
for information on storing the REC END point.  
• See “Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys” on  
page 63.  
ABS 0  
REC END  
4
3
2
1
Checking and adjusting the edit points  
ABS 0  
After you store the edit points, you can check them on the  
display by pressing the corresponding keys.  
You may also adjust the points.  
On the other hand, if all Real tracks contain data as shown below,  
erasing data on tracks 3 and 4 will move up REC END to the end  
point of tracks 1 and 2.  
1. While the recorder section is stopped, press and hold down  
the SHIFT key and press the memory key for which you wish  
to check the edit point.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
(REC END)  
4
3
2
1
You can preview “fade-out” at the AUTO PUNCH IN point  
and “fade-in” at AUTO PUNCH OUT point.  
Real track  
Real track  
2. Trim the edit point while previewing.  
ABS 0  
REC END  
• Refer to “Preview Function” on page 69 for more information.  
4
3
2
1
Executing Erase  
ABS 0  
REC END  
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the track to erase  
to set it READY.  
You can select a mono track, multiple tracks, or all tracks.  
2. Press the EDIT key repeatedly until [Erase] flashes on the  
display.  
Follow the steps below to erase data:  
Store the erase start point (AUTO PUNCH IN point) and  
the erase end point (AUTO PUNCH OUT point).  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Use the Preview function to check the stored edit points  
and adjust them if necessary.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The flashing [Erase] message lights up steadily, and  
[SURE ?] flashes.  
Specify a track to erase and execute the function.  
SURE ?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
To cancel the erase operation, press the STOP button or the  
EXIT/NO key while [SURE ?] flashes on the display.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
The FD-4 starts erasing the data and [Erase ....] flashes.  
When the erase operation is completed, [COMPLETED !]  
lights up.  
Track Exchange  
The Track Exchange function enables you to swap mono  
track data or multiple track data of the current Program.  
You can swap mono track data between Real tracks and  
Additional tracks. You can swap multiple track data between  
two Real tracks (1–2, or 3–4) and Additional tracks (L and  
R).  
5. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
The FD-4 exits edit mode and displays the previous Time  
Base indication.  
Refer to the diagrams below for information on how data  
on the tracks can be moved using this function.  
The Track Exchange function also enables you to move Real  
track data to an empty Additional track (to empty the origi-  
nal Real track) so that you can use the Real track for a new  
recording. This application adds flexibility to the usage of  
tracks. You can move data on the Additional track back to  
the Real track to audition the data, since data in an Addi-  
tional track cannot be played in real-time.  
To erase the data in its entirety from the tracks, you can also use  
the Program Delete function to erase the entire Program.  
In either case, you can expand the recordable area on the disk.  
Use either one of the erase operations to erase unnecessary  
data if the FD-4 displays an alarm message indicating insufficient  
recordable space for Auto Punch In/Out, Copy & Paste, or Move  
& Paste.  
• Refer to “Deleting a Program” on page 38 for more information  
on the Program Delete function.  
You can also use this function when you wish to check the  
REC END point of the Additional track, as described in the  
“Erase” section.  
Undo/Redo Erase  
Swapping data between Real tracks (mono track data)  
You can undo or redo the Erase operation.  
<Before swap>  
Additional track R  
Additional track L  
<After swap>  
To restore the data that existed before you erased it, press the  
UNDO/REDO key.  
Additional track R  
Additional track L  
data on Real track 2  
Real track 3  
To restore the data after you undo the Erase operation, press the  
UNDO/REDO key again.  
Real track 4  
Real track 3  
When you press the UNDO/REDO key, the FD-4 will undo or redo the  
operation immediately, and display [Undo!] or [Redo !] and [COM-  
PLETED !].  
data on Real track 4  
Real track 1  
Real track 2  
Real track 1  
<Note>  
The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-4 is stopped.  
Swapping data between a Real track and anAdditional track (mono  
track data)  
<Note>  
If you perform one of the following operations after you use the  
Copy & Paste or Move and Paste operation, the Undo/Redo func-  
tion will no longer be effective.  
data on Real track 1  
Additional track R  
Additional track L  
Additional track L  
Real track 4  
Real track 4  
1. When a new recording is made.  
2. When a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move &  
Paste, Erase).  
Real track 3  
Real track 3  
Real track 2  
Real track 2  
3. While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when the AUTO PUNCH  
IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
data on Additional track R  
Real track 1  
6. When the disk is ejected.  
Swapping data between Real tracks and Additional tracks (mul-  
tiple track data)  
data on Real track 4  
data on Real track 3  
Additional track R  
Additional track L  
Additional track R  
Additional track L  
Real track 4  
Real track 3  
Real track 2  
Real track 1  
Real track 2  
Real track 1  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Executing Track Exchange  
• Swapping mono track data  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the EDIT key repeatedly  
until [TRK Exchg] flashes on the display.  
Alternatively, you can press the EDIT key, then use the  
JOG dial.  
1. When [L–R] is flashing, turn the JOG dial.  
Turning the JOG dial allows you to select a mono track  
from [1], [2], [3], [4], [L], and [R] in the left column.  
The right column continues to indicate [1].  
For example, if you select [4] in the left column, the  
display indicates [4<>1], meaning you can swap data  
between tracks 4 and 1.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the track selection.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The current display shows that you can swap two-track  
data between Additional tracks L/R and rear tracks 1–2.  
If you wish to select other tracks, follow the steps below.  
2. To select a number in the right column, press the  
HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD button  
to move the flashing cursor to the right column, then  
use the JOG dial to select the desired number.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
*Whenyouswapdatabetweenmonotracks, theindications[4<>1]  
and [1<>4], for example, mean the same thing — swapping data  
between tracks 1 and 4.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Select the tracks to swap data.  
<Note>  
If you select the same tracks for swapping mono track data, the  
setting is ignored. The FD-4 will indicate [Select Err] for a short mo-  
ment, then return to the previous display.  
• Selecting Additional tracks L–R and Real tracks 3–4:  
1. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to move a flashing cursor on [L–R] (left) to  
[1–2](right).  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[Exchange] lights up and the swapping operation is  
completed immediately.  
The FD-4 indicates [COMPLETED !], then returns to the  
previous Time Base display.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
* You cannot play data or check the REC END point on the  
Additional tracks. To do so, you need to move the data to a  
Real track.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Turn the JOG dial to change flashing [1–2] to flashing  
[3–4].  
If you load back-up data from an external DAT recorder, the  
data maintains the same condition as when you previously  
saved it to DAT.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cue & Review Function  
Cue & Review Function  
This chapter explains how to use the “Cue & Review func-  
tion” with the REWIND button, the F FWD button, and the  
JOG/SHUTTLE feature. Using this function enables you to  
fast forward or rewind at different speeds while the recorder  
section is playing or stopped.  
Cue & Review function using the SHUTTLE feature  
You may cue and review data at a speed from normal to 64-  
times speed, using the SHUTTLE feature while the recorder  
is playing.  
During the Cue & Review operation, you will hear the sound  
recorded on the disk, which makes it easy for you to locate  
the desired point.  
EQ  
EQ  
Cue & Review function using the REWIND and  
F FWD buttons  
You may cue & review the audio data at three-times speed  
while the recorder is playing.  
2
1. Press the PLAY button to play the audio data.  
2. Press the F FWD button during playback.  
[FWD>] appears on the display, and the FD-4 cues in the  
forward direction at three-times speed.  
ABS  
3 1  
M
S
F
PGM  
1. Press the PLAY button to start playback.  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
CLK  
2. Hold down the SHIFT key and turn the JOG dial clockwise or  
counter-clockwise.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Turning the JOG dial clockwise will change the cueing  
speed. Turning the JOG dial counter-clockwise will change  
the reviewing speed.  
3. Press the PLAY button again to restore the original play  
back speed.  
4. Press the REWIND button instead of the F FWD button.  
[<RWD] appears on the display, and the FD-4 cues in the  
reverse direction at three-times speed.  
The FD-4 displays the selected cue or review speed, which  
you can select from normal, two-times, four-times, eight-  
times, 16-times, 32-times, and 64-times speed.  
As long as you are holding down the SHIFT key, playback  
continues at the selected speed.  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
ABS  
ABS  
M
S
F
M
S
F
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
PGM  
PGM  
SCSI  
CLK  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
CLK  
SCSI  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Display of 32-times cue>  
<Display of 16-times review>  
5. PressthePLAYbuttontorestoretheoriginalplaybackspeed.  
3. Release the SHIFT key to cancel the cue and review  
operation.  
The recorder resumes playback at the original speed.  
Digital scrubbing using the JOG dial  
You may perform digital scrubbing while the recorder sec-  
tion is stopped.  
<Note>  
The cue and review operation does not affect pitch. Because the  
FD-4 performs this function by skipping part of data during play-  
back.  
1. Turn the JOG dial clockwise or counter-clockwise while the  
recorder section is stopped.  
You can perform digital scrubbing in the forward or  
reverse direction.  
<Note>  
[FWD>] or [<REW] appears on the display.  
When you release the JOG dial, [STILL] appears, and the  
transport section stops.  
When the beginning of the disk is reached during the review opera-  
tion, the FD-4 starts normal playback, even if you are still holding  
down the SHIFT key. When the end of the disk (ABS time: 23H 59M  
59S) is reached during the cue operation, the FD-4 stops and the  
PLAY button LED flashes.  
2. Press the STOP button to cancel digital scrubbing.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
You can store time information (time or bar/beat/clock) in  
Storing and editing the locate points to the  
memory keys  
each memory key. The stored time information will be used  
to locate a point in data in the recorder section, or as an  
edit point to perform the Auto Punch In/Out, Copy & Paste,  
Storing in real-time  
Move & Paste, or Erase function.  
You can store the locate point (in the ABS, MTC, or BAR/  
This chapter describes how to store data in the memory  
BEAT/CLK Time Base) in real-time while the FD-4 is  
keys and edit the stored data.  
playing.  
Data stored in the memory keys is used in the following  
operations:  
• Select the desired Time Base using the TIME BASE SEL key  
if you wish to use a Time Base other than ABS.  
Locating the AUTO PUNCH IN point  
Recording start point for the Auto Punch In/  
Out operation  
• The stored or edited locate points are used only in the currently-  
selected Program.  
AUTO PUNCH IN key  
Paste start point for the Copy & Paste or Move  
& Paste operation  
Erase start point for the Erase operation  
Locating the AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
Recording end point for theAuto Punch In/Out  
operation  
EQ  
EQ  
AUTO PUNCH OUT  
key  
Erase end point for the Erase operation  
Locating the CLIPBOARD IN point  
Copy start point for copying or moving data to  
the clipboard during the Copy & Paste or Move  
& Paste operation  
4
3
CLIPBOARD IN key  
Locating the CLIPBOARD OUT point  
Copy end point for copying or moving data to  
the clipboard during the Copy & Paste or Move  
& Paste operation  
CLIPBOARD OUT key  
1
Locating the AUTO RTN START point  
LocateendpointfromAUTORTNENDinAuto  
Return or Auto Repeat modes  
AUTO RTN START key  
AUTO RTN END key  
2
Locating the AUTO RTN END point  
LocatestartpointtoAUTORTNSTARTinAuto  
Return or Auto Repeat modes  
1. Press the PLAY button to play back data.  
2. When the point you wish to store is reached, press the  
HOLD/> key.  
The time value or bar/beat/clock value of the point is  
captured. The FD-4 enters data edit mode.  
<Note on storing the locate point>  
When you set the IN/OUT points for Auto Punch In/Out, IN/OUT  
points for Copy & Clip/Move & Clip, and START/END points for  
Auto Return/Auto Repeat, make sure that IN points precede the  
OUT points and START points precede the END points.  
3. Press the STORE key.  
The STORE LED lights up.  
4. Press the desired memory key.  
• You can store locate points for each Program. (You need to  
select a Program first.)  
The STORE LED turns off.  
The captured time value (or bar/beat/clock value) is  
stored in the memory key. After the data is stored, the  
FD-4 displays the previous Time Base and continues  
playback.  
• The data can be also saved or loaded even after the Song data is  
saved or loaded.  
• All locate points stored in the memory keys will be maintained  
after you turn off the FD-4.  
In addition to the memory keys, you can store data in the  
LOCATE key in real-time. The LOCATE key always stores the  
point most recently located by the FD-4. That is, data in the  
LOCATE key is overwritten by new data each time the FD-4  
locates a point. You can also edit the data in the LOCATE key.  
Refer to the following pages for more information on how to edit  
data.  
• You can omit Step 2 above to speed operation.  
• If you set “BAR/BEAT Resolution mode” in SETUP mode to ON,  
the FD-4 will round off the CLK value of the captured bar/beat/  
clock value. That is, the locate point will be at the beginning of the  
beat (00). Refer to page 92 for more information.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
Editing and storing locate data  
Editing and storing data  
If you know the position of the desired locate point, follow  
the steps below.  
You can recall data stored in the memory key, edit it, and  
store it. again  
1, 4  
4
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
3
3
2
2
2
2
1, 2  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the memory key that stores  
the data you wish to edit.  
1. Press the HOLD/> key while the FD-4 is stopped.  
The currently-displayed time value (or bar/beat/clock  
value) is captured and the FD-4 enters data edit mode.  
The stored data appears on the display and the FD-4  
enters data edit mode.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, REWIND button, or the F FWD button  
to move the flashing cursor on the time value digit, and use  
the JOG dial to increase or decrease the value.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, REWIND button, or the F FWD button  
to move the flashing cursor to the time value digit, and use  
the JOG dial to increase or decrease the value.  
3. Press the STORE key.  
3. Press the STORE key.  
The STORE LED lights up.  
The STORE LED lights up.  
4. Press the desired memory key.  
4. Press the memory key that you pressed in Step 1 again.  
The STORE LED will turn off.  
The STORE LED turns off.  
The input time value (or bar/beat/clock value) is stored  
in the corresponding memory key.  
The edited data is stored, and the FD-4 displays the  
previous Time Base indication.  
• Press the STORE key instead of the HOLD/> key in Step 1 above  
and omit Step 3 to speed operation.  
• You can store the edited data in a memory key other than the one  
you pressed when you recalled the data. For example, you can  
recall the AUTO PUNCH IN point data, edit it, and store it to the  
AUTO PUNCH OUT key.  
• Refer to page 43 for more information on Auto Punch In/Out.  
• Refer to page 56 for more information on Copy & Paste, Move &  
Paste, and Erase.  
• Refer to page 66 for more information on Auto Return and Auto  
Repeat.  
• You can also use the Preview function to edit the stored locate  
points (edit points). Refer to “Preview Function” on page 69 for  
more information.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
Editing the data stored in the LOCATE key  
You can recall the last located point and edit the value.  
You can use the edited value to locate the point later or  
store it to another memory key.  
4
EQ  
EQ  
2
1
3
2
2
1. Press the SHIFT and LOCATE keys simultaneously while  
the FD-4 is stopped.  
The last located point stored in the LOCATE key appears  
on the display and the FD-4 enters data edit mode.  
If no data is stored (that is, if the FD-4 has not located any  
point since the power was turned on), 00H 00M 00S 00F  
00SF appears and “00” of the digits “00S” flashes.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, REWIND button, or the F FWD button  
to move the flashing cursor to the time value digit, and use  
the JOG dial to increase or decrease the number to the  
desired value.  
3. To located the edited point, press the LOCATE key.  
When you execute the Locate function, the locate point is  
stored as locate data in the LOCATE key.  
4. To store the edited data to another memory key, input the  
desired value, press the STORE key, then press the desired  
memory key.  
The data is stored to the corresponding memory key.  
The data stored in the LOCATE key will not change.  
<Note>  
You cannot preview the data stored in the LOCATE key, unlike other  
memory keys.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locate Function  
Locate Function  
The FD-4 locates the desired edit point immediately (that  
is, it moves the current position of the data in the recorder  
section).  
Auto Play  
The Auto Play function allows the FD-4 to start play back  
automatically from the located point. AUTO PLAY mode  
should be turned on before you execute the Direct Locate  
function described above.  
Locate points include edit points (in ABS time, MTC time, or  
in bar/beat/clock) that are stored for the Copy, Move, Paste,  
Erase, and Auto Punch In/Out operations.  
They also include the top of a Program (ABS 0), the  
recording end point in a Program (REC END), and a direct  
locate point for which you can specify the time.  
You can also use the Auto functions, such as Auto Play,  
Auto Return, and Auto Repeat, with the Locate function.  
<Note>  
This function is effective within 24 ABS hours. Therefore, if playback  
continues over the recording end point, the FD-4 will still continue count-  
ing the time. Also, when the FD-4 locatesABS REC END, it will continue  
counting the time from the recording end point. (However, the FD-4 does  
not access the disk after reaching the recording end point.)  
Direct Locate  
(Example) Locating the AUTO PUNCH IN point  
The Direct Locate function enables you to locate the follow-  
ing points:  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
• Locate the beginning of the Program (LOCATE ABS 0)  
Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP button. The  
FD-4 will immediately locate the beginning of the currently-selected  
Program.  
Locate  
Playback  
Locate  
Executing the Auto Play function  
• Locate the recording end point of the Program (LOCATE  
REC END)  
Press the F FWD button while holding down the STOPbutton. The FD-  
4 will immediately locate the end point of the currently-selected Pro-  
gram.  
2
EQ  
EQ  
• Locate the position stored in one of the memory keys  
Press the desired memory key, then press the LOCATE key. The FD-4  
will locate the point (edit point) stored in the corresponding memory key  
immediately.  
3
• Locate a specified point  
Refer to “Editing and storing locate data” in the chapter “Storing a Lo-  
cate Point (Edit Point)” for information on how to edit the data and on  
pressing the LOCATE key instead of the STORE key. The point at  
specified time value (or bar/beat/clock value) will be located immedi-  
ately.  
1
• Locate the last-located point  
1. Press the AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY key to turn on the [PLAY]  
indicator on the bottom of the display.  
Press the LOCATE key.  
Since the LOCATE key always stores the last-located point (excluding  
LOCATEABS 0 and LOCATE REC END), just press the LOCATE key  
to locate the last-located point again.  
AUTO  
PLAY  
2. Press the desired memory key.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locate Function  
2. Press the AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY key to turn on the [RTN]  
indicator at the bottom of the display.  
3. Press the LOCATE key.  
The FD-4 locates the point and plays as shown in the  
diagram.  
AUTO  
RTN  
• You can set a preroll time in the [Preroll ?] menu in SETUP mode  
so that the FD-4 will start playback preroll time before the locate  
point. You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds. Refer to  
thechapterChangingtheInitialSettings(SETUPMode)onpage  
85.  
3. Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN END point.  
The FD-4 operates as shown in the diagram and stops at  
the AUTO RTN START point.  
You can set a preroll time in the [Preroll ?] menu in SETUP mode  
so that the FD-4 will start playback preroll time before the locate  
point. You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds. Refer to  
the chapter “Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” on page  
85.  
Auto Return  
This function allows the FD-4 to play data up to the AUTO  
RTN END point, then automatically locate the AUTO RTN  
START point as shown in the diagram below.  
To enable this function, AUTO RTN mode should be on and  
the AUTO RTN START point and AUTO RTN END point  
should already be set.  
<Auto Return operation>  
AUTO RTN END point  
AUTO RTN START point  
Playback  
Locate  
Stop  
Executing the Auto Return function  
1
EQ  
EQ  
2
3
1. Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END points.  
Refer to the chapter “Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)”  
on page 63 for information on storing the desired points  
in the AUTO RTN START key and the AUTO RTN END  
key.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locate Function  
2. Press the AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY key to turn on the [PLAY  
RTN] indicator on the bottom of the display.  
Auto Repeat  
The Auto Repeat function allows the FD-4 to repeat play-  
back up to the AUTO RTN END point, automatically locate  
the AUTO RTN START point, then play up to the AUTO RTN  
END point until you cancel the function by pressing the  
STOP button. To enable this function, both AUTO PLAY  
mode and AUTO RTN mode should be turned on, and the  
AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point  
should already be set.  
AUTO  
PLAY  
RTN  
3. Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN START point.  
The FD-4 operates as shown in the diagram, and stops at  
the AUTO RTN START point.  
• You can set a preroll time in the [Preroll ?] menu in SETUP mode  
so that the FD-4 will start playback preroll time before the locate  
point. You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds. Refer to  
the chapter “Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” on page  
85.  
Using this function will facilitate the Auto Punch In/Out  
and Manual Punch In/Out rehearsal. See “Hint” after the  
following section.  
<Auto Repeat operation>  
<Hint>  
AUTO RTN END point  
AUTO RTN START point  
You can make repeated Auto Punch In/Out rehearsal much easier  
and quicker by using the Auto Repeat function. Set theAUTO RTN  
START point prior to theAUTO PUNCH IN point, and set theAUTO  
RTN END point after the AUTO PUNCH OUT point. The recorder  
will repeat the operation automatically so you can concentrate on  
your rehearsal.  
Playback  
Locate  
When the AUTO RTN END point is reached, the  
FD-4 will locate the AUTO RTN START point, then  
start playback from that point. The FD-4 will repeat  
this operation until you stop it.  
Cancel Auto Repeat mode before you record a take.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
AUTO RTN END point  
AUTO RTN START point  
Rehearsal range  
Playback  
Executing the Auto Repeat function  
Locate  
1
The FD-4 will play this range repeatedly for rehearsal, which  
makes it easy for you to check the recording level and practice  
your performance.  
EQ  
EQ  
2
3
1. Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END points.  
Refer to the chapter “Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)”  
on page 63 for information on storing the desired points  
in the AUTO RTN START key and the AUTO RTN END  
key.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preview Function  
Preview Function  
• Previewing the rise of the sound (fade in)  
The preview function enables you to repeatedly audition  
the rise (fade in) or the fall (fade out) of the sound data at  
a locate point (edit point) that is stored in the AUTO PUNCH  
IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, or CLIPBOARD IN/OUT  
key. This is also called “point rehearsal.”  
While holding down the SHIFT key, press the AUTO RTN  
START key, the AUTO PUNCH OUT key, or CLIPBOARD IN  
key.  
<Display indication during the Preview operation>  
With this function, you can check the locate points in real-  
time.  
ABS  
F
LOC  
H
M
S
SF  
You can also use this function to fine-tune the position of  
the locate points while previewing the sound.  
This function is effective only when the FD-4 is stopped.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Executing the Preview function  
1
Approx. 2 sec.  
EQ  
EQ  
Approx, 1 sec.  
Approx, 1 sec.  
(mute playback)  
(normal playback)  
The sound rises at the memory point.  
The FD-4 repeats playback the “rise sound” at the locate point (edit  
point). As shown in the diagram, one-second of data prior to the  
locate point is muted during playback. The mute is off (fade in) at the  
locate point and the sound is played back for one second.  
The FD-4 will repeat this operation until you quit the Preview  
function.  
• Previewing the fall of the sound (fade out)  
While holding down the SHIFT key, press the AUTO END  
START key, the AUTO PUNCH IN key, or the CLIPBOARD OUT  
key.  
1 2  
<Display indication during the Preview operation>  
1. PressthedesiredmemorykeywhileholdingdowntheSHIFT  
key when the FD-4 is stopped.  
ABS  
F
LOC  
H
M
S
SF  
Pressing the desired memory key will enable you to  
preview the sound at the locate point (edit point) stored  
in the corresponding memory key.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Operation  
Memory key  
The FD-4 plays the fall (fade out) of the  
sound at the locate point stored in the  
keys.  
AUTO PUNCH IN key  
AUTO RTN END key  
CLIPBOARD OUT key  
Approx. 2 sec.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT key  
AUTO RTN START key  
CLIPBOARD IN key  
The FD-4 plays the rise (fade in) of the  
sound at the locate point stored in the  
keys.  
Approx, 1 sec.  
Approx, 1 sec.  
(normal playback)  
(mute playback)  
Refer to the following diagram for the display indication  
during the Preview operation.  
The sound falls at the memory point.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preview Function  
The FD-4 repeats playback of the “fall sound” at the locate point (edit  
point). As shown in the diagram, one-second of data prior to the  
locate point is played back, then muted (fade out) at the locate point.  
The muted playback continues for one second. The FD-4 will repeat  
this operation until you quit the Preview function.  
1. Start previewing the sound by following the steps described  
on the previous page.  
2. Use the JOG dial to trim the position.  
When previewing starts, the unit of JOG trimming flashes  
on the screen. For example, SF (sub-frame) flashes if ABS  
Time Base or MTC Time Base is selected. CLK (clock)  
flashes if BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected.  
Quitting the Preview function  
The flashing value also indicates the position you can  
trim.  
2. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
Trimming the sound while previewing  
(Example) Time Base is ABS: (SF flashes.)  
You can trim the position of the locate point (edit point)  
using the JOG dial while you preview the sound.  
ABS  
F
LOC  
H
M
S
SF  
Flashing  
At this time, you can also adjust the size of the trimming  
steps (the amount of offset controlled by the JOG dial).  
Trimming allows you to fine-tune the position of the locate  
pointstoredinthememorykeyswhilepreviewingthesound.  
Use this function to change the Auto Punch In/Out points,  
the start point of Copy & Paste and Move & Paste, and the  
start and end points of the Erase function.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
(Example) Time Base is BAR/BEAT/CLK (CLK flashes.)  
<Notes>  
BAR  
CLK  
Flashing  
LOC  
• You can audition the result of trimming during the next preview.  
That is, if you trim the position while previewing the sound for the  
first time, you can check the result when you preview the sound  
next time.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
• If the locate point is shifted outside the range of the preview  
playback as a result of trimming, [Void Data!] and the locate  
point indication appear alternately. In this case, you cannot use  
the Preview function. Trim the position again so that it will be  
within the playback range.  
3. To change the unit of trimming, press the HOLD/> key, the  
REWIND button, or the F FWD button.  
These buttons will change the trimming unit as follows:  
Time Base  
ABS or MTC  
BAR/BEAT/CLK  
• When Auto Punch mode is turned on and you trim the Auto  
Punch In or Auto Punch Out point while previewing the sound  
with [Void Data!] indicated on the display, Auto Punch mode will  
be cancelled.  
HOLD/> key  
or  
CLK -> BAR ->  
SF ->H ->M -> S ->F  
F FWD button  
1
CLK <- BAR <-  
SF <-H <- M <- S <- F  
REWIND  
button  
EQ  
EQ  
4. Trim the position at the selected unit (digit).  
Quitting the trimming function  
3
5
5. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
The trimmed locate point (edit point) data will be stored  
in the corresponding memory key.  
2, 4  
3
1 5  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
MIDI Synchronization  
Creating a Tempo Map  
MIDI clock sync system  
1. Specify time signatures for the measures using the “Setting  
a time signature” menu in SETUP mode. Then, specify the  
tempo for given measures and beats using the “Setting a  
tempo” menu in SETUP mode.  
You can configure the sync system to use a stand-alone  
sequencer synchronizing as a MIDI clock slave by inserting  
time signature settings and tempo settings at any position  
in a song using a programmable Tempo Map of the FD-4.  
In this system, the recorder output of the FD-4 is routed to  
the input channel faders, and up to four MIDI sound sources  
connected to the input jacks are routed to the MON mix  
section. In this way, you can mix down up to eight channel  
sound sources without using an external mixing console.  
You can also mix down digital signals to an external digital  
master recorder by connecting MON OUT (L/R) of the FD-4  
to RECORDER IN.  
• See pages 82 and 83 for more information.  
2. Play the FD-4 in play mode to see if the MIDI sequencer  
synchronizes to the FD-4 according to the Tempo Map.  
At this time, select the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base to see if  
the MIDI sequencer synchronizes correctly.  
• Initialize the FD-4 before the operation.  
Overdubbing  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
1. Overdub the syncing MIDI sound sources to tracks 1–4 as  
described in the “Basic Recording and Playback” chapter.  
You can also record a MIDI sound source as a guide.  
Connecting and setting an external device  
Effect unit 2  
Effect unit 1  
MixingdownwhilesyncingMIDIsoundsources  
When you finish overdubbing, proceed to mixdown.  
As shown in the diagram, use the connected MIDI sound  
sources as virtual tracks, synchronize them to the FD-4,  
and mix down digital signals while applying effects.  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
SCSI  
R
Effect unit 1  
Effect unit 2  
Digital Master Recorder  
MIDI sequencer  
EQ  
EQ  
1. Connect the MIDI OUT jack of the FD-4 to the MIDI IN jack of  
the MIDI sequencer.  
MIDI  
2. Set the MIDI sequencer to “MIDI clock slave” mode, and  
connect the MIDI sound source (played automatically) to the  
input jack of the FD-4.  
Sequencer  
3. Connect the effect units, if desired.  
Setting MIDI SYNC OUT  
1. In the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu in SETUP  
mode, select “MIDI clock (Clk)” for the MIDI sync signal  
output.  
MIDI sound sources  
If you wish to use the Metronome function, turn the  
“Setting the Metronome function” menu in SETUP mode  
to ON.  
1. Set the channel 1–4 INPUT SEL switches to [TRK].  
• See pages 85 and 86 for more information.  
2. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [L/R+MON].  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
3. Raise the master faders L/R to [7–8].  
MTC sync/Machine Control system  
4. Connect the MON OUT (L/R) jacks and the RECORDER IN  
jacks directly.  
This section explains a synchronization system controlled  
by a computer using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) and  
controlled by MTC (MIDI time code) output from the FD-4.  
The FD-4 adds a given offset value to the ABS time on the  
disk and outputs the information as MTC of a given frame  
rate. In addition, the FD-4 can receive external MMC and  
Fostex System Exclusive Message (FEX) to perform certain  
operations. Changing the device ID number included in the  
messages transmitted from the computer allows you to con-  
trol various operations on the FD-4 individually. Use the  
“Setting the MIDI device number” menu in SETUP mode to  
set the device ID number.  
This connection will route the L/R+MON signals output  
from MON OUT (L/R) to the DATA OUT jacks via the  
RECORDER IN jacks for mixdown. (The L/R+MON signals  
included the playback signals from tracks 1-4 and four  
MIDI sound sources.)  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
SCSI  
R
• Initialize the FD-4.  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
Connecting an external device  
5. Set the “Setting digital output tracks” in SETUP mode to  
[L– , r- ].  
Effect unit 2  
Effect unit 1  
• See page 92 for more information.  
6. Use the input channel faders and the PAN knobs to adjust  
the playback levels and stereo image of tracks 1–4.  
Turn the MON knob in the MON mix section of the  
corresponding channels toward [INPUT] to adjust the  
input level of the MIDI sound sources, and use the MON  
PAN knob to adjust the stereo image.  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
SCSI  
R
7. Use the MASTER knob in the monitor section to adjust the  
final output level for mixdown.  
8. If you wish to apply effects to a track, turn theAUX knob and  
AUX RTN knob of the corresponding channel to adjust the  
effect amount and balance.  
MMC MTC  
Computer  
with MMC/MTC  
compatible software  
MIDI  
1. Connect the MIDI IN jack and MIDI out jack to the MIDI OUT/  
IN jacks of the computer (using a MIDI interface).  
The computer should be running sequence software that  
supports MMC and MTC.  
2. Set the sequence software to MTC slave mode and MMC  
output mode, and select the desired MTC frame rate.  
3. Connect the MIDI sound sources and effect units  
accordingly, in the manner as explained in the “MIDI clock  
sync system” section.  
Setting MIDI SYNC OUT  
1. Set the MIDI sync signal to be output to “MTC (Mtc)” in the  
“Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu in SETUP mode.  
At this time, select [MTC] for Time Base for convenience.  
• Refer to page 86 for more information on SETUP mode.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
Effect unit 1  
Setting MTC OFFSET  
Effect unit 2  
Digital Master  
Recorder  
1. Set the time offset from theABS time (less than six hours) in  
the “Setting an MTC offset value” menu in SETUP mode.  
• See page 88 for more information.  
MTC MMC  
EQ  
EQ  
Setting a frame rate  
1. Select the same MTC frame rate as that for the sequence  
software in the “Setting an MTC frame rate” in SETUP mode.  
• See page 87 for more information.  
Computer  
with MMC/MTC  
compatible software  
Setting the device ID number  
1. Set the same device ID number as the MMC device number  
for the sequence software and the FEX device number in  
the “Setting the device ID number” menu in SETUP mode.  
You do not set a number if the sequence software  
transmits [7Fh], which means [ALL DEVICE].  
MIDI sound sources  
MIDI  
• See page 93 for more information.  
<Please read this>  
About MMC REC Out function  
If you use the MMC REC Out function, operating the FD-4 will cause the  
MIDI OUT connector to output the MMC command that corresponds to  
the operation.  
Checking synchronization and Machine Control  
1. Operate the FD-4 in play mode, and check to see if the  
sequence software synchronizes to the MTC output from  
the FD-4.  
Check to see if the FD-4 plays, stops, and locates points  
correctly when it is controlled from the computer.  
For example, pressing the PLAY button while pressing the RECORD  
button will output the MMC REC command from the MIDI OUT connec-  
tor. The following commands are output:  
Output MMC command  
Operation on the FD-4  
(Device No. = 7F fixed)  
PLAY + RECORD buttons  
Punch In operation in TAKE mode  
REC command  
Overdubbing  
of Auto Punch In/Out.  
Punch In operation via a footswitch.  
RECORD button ON/OFF.  
1. Overdub on tracks 1 – 4 as explained in “Overdubbing” of  
the “MIDI clock sync system” section.  
Input monitor ON/OFF command  
Rehearsal In in rehearsal mode of Auto  
Punch In/Out.  
Rehearsal In via a footswitch.  
PLAY button  
Mixing down while syncing the MIDI sound sources  
1. Synchronizetheoutputfromtracks14withfourMIDIsound  
sources, and mix down while applying the effects, as  
explained in “Mixing down while syncing MIDI sound  
sources” in the “MIDI clock sync system” section.  
Punch out in TAKE mode  
REC EXIT command  
of Auto Punch In/Out  
Punch out via a footswitch.  
STOP button  
STOP command  
These MMC commands are output only when you operate the buttons  
on the FD-4. They are not output when the FD-4 receives external MMC  
commands.  
You cannot turn off the MMC REC Out function. Whenever you perform  
any of the operations described above, the corresponding command is  
output. This is something you should note. If the sequencer connected  
to the FD-4’s MIDI OUT is in record mode and you operate the FD-4,  
the corresponding MMC command will be recorded in a track on the  
sequencer. Then, if MIDI data is sent from the sequencer to the FD-4,  
the MMC command recorded in the sequence data will cause the FD-4  
to enter record mode.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
Sync system in Slave mode  
* See “Setting Offset mode” on page 88 for more information.  
You can set up the system in which the FD-4 in Slave mode  
synchronizes to an external master MIDI device.  
In this example, a master device is a computer running  
sequence software.  
4. Turn Slave mode ON in the “Setting the Slave mode” menu  
in SETUP mode.  
* See “Setting the Slave mode” on page 88 for more information.  
<Note>  
5. Set the slave type to [Vari] in the “Setting the Slave type”  
menu in SETUP mode.  
Make sure to use an external MIDI device that is able to output  
MTC as a master device.  
* See “Setting the Slave type” on page 89 for more information.  
• Initialize the FD-4 before you start the operation.  
6. PresstheTIMEBASESELkeytodisplaytheMTCTimeBase.  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
<Notes on setting MTC-related parameters>  
The MTC offset time and MTC offset mode determines whether or  
not MTC (MTC offset time) is output atABS 0 or 001BAR 1 00CLK.  
Follow the guide below, according to the start time of the song of the  
sequence software.  
Connecting an external device  
1. Connect the MIDI OUT jack of a computer running sequence  
software to the MIDI IN jack of the FD-4.  
The connected computer should be running sequence  
software that supports MMC/MTC.  
• Offset mode = ABS:  
Set the MTC offset time to three seconds prior to the start time of  
the song of the sequence software. The FD-4 does not chase and  
lock to incoming MTC immediately. To synchronize the FD-4 from  
the beginning of the song, you need to set a preroll time and play  
the song a little before the top of the song of the sequence software.  
INPUT  
4
INPUT  
3
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
4
INSERT  
3
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
RECORDER IN  
L
SCSI  
R
• Offset mode = BAR :  
You can set the MTC offset time to the start time of the song.  
As explained previously, theABS 0 position is [-002BAR 1 00CLK],  
which allows for synchronization from the top of the song. The dura-  
tion of two measures changes depending on the setting of the time  
signature and the tempo of the first measure. (Example: slow tempo  
= longer duration)  
MTC  
with Sequence  
Software  
Checking the chase and lock operation  
1. When you play the sequence software, the [MTC IN]  
indicator on the display lights up, and the flashing [SLAVE]  
lights up continuously, which indicates that chase and lock  
is complete.  
At this time, make sure that MTC output from the  
sequence software is being displayed on the FD-4.  
Setting up the external device  
1. Set the following items on the sequence software.  
• Set up the sequence software to output MTC.  
• Set a frame rate of MTC.  
• Check the start time of the song.  
* Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the external device  
for more information.  
2. When you stop the sequence software, MTC transmission  
is interrupted and the FD-4 stops.  
The [SLAVE] indicator on the display starts flashing.  
Setting the FD-4  
3. While the sequence software is fast forwarding or  
rewinding, the FD-4 remains stopped. As soon as you start  
playbackorrecord, theFD-4immediatelyperformsthechase  
and lock operation.  
1. Set the frame rate of the sequence software, as described in  
the “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu in SETUP mode.  
* See “Setting an MTC frame rate” on page 87 for more information.  
<Note>  
2. Set an offset time value in the “Setting an MTC offset value”  
menu in SETUP mode.  
The FD-4 can chase and lock to MTC only when the speed variation of  
MTC sent from the master device (computer) is within +/-5.6%.  
Within this range, the FD-4 will use the Vari Pitch function internally to  
chase MTC. If this range is exceeded, the FD-4 cannot chase and lock.  
If the speed variation of the master device is large, play the sequencer  
before recording so that the FD-4 will learn the speed of the master  
device. In this way, the FD-4 will lock to time code quicker next time.  
* See “Setting an MTC offset value” on page 87 for more information.  
3. Set the desired mode in the “Setting Offset mode” menu in  
SETUP mode.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
• If the FD-4 does not chase and lock correctly, check the connecting  
cables and settings.  
Recording  
You can record data on the FD-4 while the FD-4 is chasing  
and locking to the sequence software signals.  
<Hint>  
About the option “Vari” in the “Setting the Slave type” in SETUP  
mode:  
If the FD-4 chases and locks to only an incoming MTC, Vari Pitch is  
applied all the time. Under this condition, if the FD-4 outputs digital  
signals to a connected digital device, the device may not be able to  
accommodate the FD-4’s speed variation (MTC speed variation of  
the master device), resulting in interrupted signal input at the digital  
device.  
To solve this problem, set the “Setting the Slave type” menu to  
“Free.” This will cause the FD-4 to follow its internal clock after it  
finishes the chase and lock operation, supplying stable digital sig-  
nals to the external digital device.  
With the “Free” setting, if the MTC offset between the master and  
slave devices exceeds “10 frames,” the slave device interprets this  
as out of lock, and tries to chase and lock again (re-chase opera-  
tion). During the re-chase operation, the audio output will be muted  
and digital signal transmission is also interrupted. If the offset is  
within 10 frames, the slave device will continue running while rec-  
ognizing the offset.  
<Note>  
If you set the “Setting the Slave type” menu to “Vari,” the FD-4  
applies Vari Pitch all the time to chase MTC.  
However, if a digital input track is assigned in the “Setting digital  
input tracks” in SETUP mode, the FD-4 will sync to incoming digital  
signals (external wordclock sync). This means that the FD-4 will not  
apply Vari Pitch during chasing even with the “Vari” setting.  
The FD-4 will sync to incoming digital signals after it locks MTC.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
<NotesonDATmachinesandthesaveandloadoperations>  
You may use a DAT machine that can record digital data in S/P DIF  
format without compression in 16bit/44.1kHz or 32kHz/SP mode.  
You cannot use media that uses a compression recording  
technique, such as an MD or DCC, media that automatically adjust  
the space between songs, such as a CD-R, media that converts  
sampling rate, or via Adat optical connectors. You can use media  
that features SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) if it  
satisfies the requirements described above.  
Outline of the save/load operation  
The FD-4 enables you to save the recorded song data (in-  
cluding SETUP data) to a connected DAT machine and load  
the saved data as is from DAT to the SCSI disk in the FD-4.  
This function allows you to work on different projects  
using the same SCSI disk.  
You can save and load one Program at a time, and select  
any Program if multiple Programs exist.  
You can also specify whether to save only four-Real tracks  
data, or both Real tracks and Additional tracks.  
The following DAT models have been confirmed to operate with the  
FD-4. Basically, any DAT machine that has digital in/out connectors  
in S/P DIF format will work for the save and load operation.  
However, some models (except those listed below) may cause  
errors.  
The following diagram shows how the data is saved to a  
DAT tape and loaded to the FD-4. (In this example, four-  
Real tracks and two-Additional tracks are saved and loaded.)  
FOSTEX: D-5  
PIONEER: D-05  
Saving from FD-4 to DAT  
Connecting a DAT machine  
Connect the FD-4 to a DAT machine using optical cables, as  
shown below.  
Use an optional Fostex COP-1 (optical coaxial converter) if  
the DAT machine has only COAXIAL connectors (RCA pin  
jacks) for digital I/O. Use an optional Fostex COP-1 if the DAT  
has only COAXIAL connectors for digital I/O.  
Loading from DAT to FD-4  
Gray: setting data  
(Beep sound is heard.)  
OPTICAL OUT  
OPTICAL IN  
COP-1  
Black: audio data  
(Recordedcontentisheard.)  
White: no data (silence)  
DATA IN  
DATA OUT  
As shown in the diagram above, tracks 1 and 2, 3 and 4,  
and L and R are paired respectively when they are saved to  
the DAT tape. If the duration of each track data is “n”  
minutes, it takes three times “n” minutes to save all four  
Real tracks and two Additional tracks. (It takes twice “n”  
minutes to save only Real tracks.)  
EQ  
EQ  
When the data is loaded, two tracks are paired in the same  
way. The data loaded into the FD-4 remains in the same  
exact condition as when you previously saved it to a DAT  
tape. Therefore, if you save unfinished data and then load  
it, you can pick up where you left off.  
To make the DAT connection clearer, other devices are omitted in the example above.  
<Notes on connection>  
If the connected DAT (preferably a professional model) features sync operation with external clock and its “INPUT (or EXTERNAL SYNC)” sync  
mode switch is set to OPTICAL, trying to load data with both digital I/Os connected as shown in the diagram may cause a digital clock loop to form  
and loading may fail.  
In this case, set the sync mode of the DAT to INTERNAL, or disconnect the optical cable from the DATA OUT of the FD-4 before loading data. This  
type of problem will not occur during the save operation since the DATA IN connector of the FD-4 is not effective.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Remember this!  
Saving song data  
In this example, song data on all tracks (4 Real tracks + 2  
Additional tracks) of Program 1 is saved to a DAT tape.  
• Set the DAT recording mode to 32kHz/SP mode to save data  
recorded on a disk formatted in Normal mode.  
FD-4  
Preparing a DAT machine  
DAT  
EQ  
EQ  
• Turn the power on to the DAT machine and insert a DAT  
tape into the DAT.  
Save  
• Check to see if the write-protect tab is closed on the DAT  
tape so the machine can record.  
Record mode: 32kHz/SP mode  
Data recorded on a disk in  
Normal mode  
• Rewind the tape to the beginning, if necessary.  
• You cannot load data with a different sampling rate.  
• Set the recording mode of the DAT so that it will record  
digital signal via the optical connector. If the data has been  
recorded on the disk in Normal mode, set the recording mode  
of the DAT to 32kHz/SP mode. Refer to the instruction manual  
that comes with the DAT machine for other settings.  
For example, if you save data recorded in Normal mode to a  
DAT tape, then load it back to the FD-4, you will be unable to load  
the data if the load destination disk has been formatted in  
Mastering mode 1 or 2 (sampling rate: 44.1kHz), and vice versa.  
FD-4  
Operation on the FD-4  
DAT  
EQ  
EQ  
Use the “Save PGM ?” menu in SETUP mode to execute the  
save operation.  
Save  
Record mode: 32kHz/SP mode  
Data recorded on a disk in  
Normal mode  
FD-4  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
Load  
1
8
Disk in Mastering 1 or Mas-  
tering 2  
• Even with the same sampling rate...  
Assume that you recorded Real tracks andAdditional tracks on the  
disk in Mastering mode 1, saved them to a DAT tape, then loaded  
them back to a disk in Mastering mode 2.  
The FD-4 will load the data normally since Mastering mode 1 and  
Mastering mode 2 use the same sampling rate. However, since  
theloaddestinationisadiskinMasteringmode2, youcannotrecord  
data to Additional tracks. That is, you were formerly able to record  
Additional tracks in real-time on the disk in Mastering mode 1, but  
now you cannot. If the original disk is in Mastering mode 2 and the  
load destination disk is in Mastering mode 1, the situation will be  
reversed. You could not record data on Additional tracks, but now  
you can.  
2, 5  
3, 4, 6, 7  
Knobs and switches for monitoring  
The gray area in the display illustration indicates it is flashing.  
1. Press the SETUP key while the FD-4 is stopped.  
The FD-4 enters SETUP mode and displays the first  
hierarchy of the menu previously selected.  
The [Sign. Set ?] menu appears in default.  
Remember that whether you can recordAdditional tracks depends  
on the disk recording mode. Refer to the notes on recording mode  
in the “Recording Preparation” chapter.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
2. Use the JOG dial to display [Save PGM ?].  
SETUP  
[?] flashes in the first hierarchy of the [Save PGM ?] menu.  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
This area indicates a negative value of  
total duration taken to save data (tracks  
1–6), which increments as the save op-  
eration progresses.  
This area indicates the tracks of  
data currently saved. In this ex-  
ample, tracks 1 and 2 are being  
saved. This will change to 3 and 4,  
then 5 and 6.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[?] stops flashing, and the Program number flashes.  
This number indicates the program that was selected  
before the FD-4 entered SETUP mode.  
Whenthesaveoperationiscomplete, [COMPLETED!]lights  
up on the display, and FD-4 stops. Stop recording on the  
DAT machine.  
If multiple Programs exist, you can select the desired  
Program in the next step.  
SETUP  
You can monitor the data using the following methods, in addi-  
tion to using the headphones connected to the DAT machine.  
PGM  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
• Monitor selector [MON]  
Turning the MON knobs for channels 1 and 2 toward [TRK 1]  
and [TRK 2] respectively  
4. Use the JOG dial to select the desired Program.  
Select [01] (Program number 1) in this example.  
You cannot select other numbers if only one Program  
exists.  
Turning the MASTER knob in the monitor section  
9. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
[COMPLETED !] disappears, the Program of the data you  
saved to the DAT is selected, and the ABS Time Base  
appears.  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-4 displays the track selection for the save  
operation, and [4] flashes. The next step allows you to  
select whether you wish to save tracks 1–4 or 1–6. (The  
following figure indicates tracks 1–4.)  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
6. Select the tracks to save using the JOG dial.  
Rotating the JOG dial causes [4] and [6] to flash  
alternately. In this example, select [6] to save data on all  
tracks including the Additional tracks.  
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[Rec Start] appears and [SURE ?] flashes.  
SETUP  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
8. Start recording on the DAT machine, then press the  
EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display changes as follows, and the save operation is  
in progress.  
The pilot signal (beep sound), tracks 1 and 2, 3 and 4,  
and 5 and 6 will be saved to the DAT tape sequentially, in  
this order. During the save operation, the level meters 1  
and 2, and L and R on the FD-4 indicate the output levels.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
2. Turn the JOG dial to display [Load PGM ?], then press the  
EXECUTE/YES key.  
Loading song data  
You can load the data from DAT to the SCSI disk of the FD-4.  
[?] stops flashing, and the Program number flashes.  
This number indicates the program that is selected on  
the load destination disk. If multiple Programs exist, you  
can select the desired Program in the next step.  
Preparing a DAT machine  
• Turn on the power to the DAT machine, and insert the tape  
that includes the data you wish to load.  
SETUP  
• Locate a point slightly before the pilot signal recorded at the  
beginning of the data.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Operation on the FD-4  
Use the “Load PGM ?” menu in SETUP mode to execute the  
load operation. This menu can be found before the “Save  
PGM ?” menu.  
SETUP  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to select the desired Program.  
You can select [01] or [02] if only one Program exists on  
the disk.  
If you select [02], [PGM] and [New] flash alternately.  
This means that you can set up a new Program. If you do  
not wish to lead data to Program 1, select [02] to  
automatically create a new Program 2 on the disk, and  
Program 2 will be selected as the destination. (In the same  
way, if Programs 1–4 exist and you select [05], [New]  
flashes. That is, if you select the next largest Program  
number, [New] flashes.)  
EQ  
EQ  
1
8
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-4 displays the track selection for the load  
operation, and [4] flashes. The next step allows you to  
select whether you wish to save tracks 1–4 or 1–6. (The  
following figure indicates tracks 1–4.)  
2, 5  
3, 4, 6, 7  
SETUP  
Knobs and switches for monitoring  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The gray area in the display illustration indicates it is flashing.  
5. Select tracks to load using the JOG dial.  
Rotating the JOG dial causes [4] and [6] to flash  
alternately. In this example, select [6] to load data on all  
tracks, including the Additional tracks.  
1. Press the SETUP key when the FD-4 is stopped.  
The FD-4 enters SETUP mode, and the first hierarchy of  
the menu previously selected appears on the display.  
The [Sign Set ?] menu appears in default.  
If you select [4], data from tracks 1–4 will be loaded.  
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
SETUP  
The load destination Program and track data to be loaded  
will be confirmed. The FD-4 displays an illuminated  
DIGITAL indicator and a flashing [SURE ?] message.  
A flashing DIGITAL indicates that the FD-4 is not  
receiving digital signals from the DAT correctly.  
Check the DAT setting and cable connections.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
DIGITAL  
SETUP  
SURE ?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
[Play DAT !] appears on the display.  
DIGITAL  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
8. Start playing the DAT machine.  
When the saved pilot signal is played, the load operation  
starts automatically. The duration for the load operation  
appears as a negative value and increments as the opera  
tion progresses. The tracks being loaded also appear on  
the display.  
DIGITAL  
SETUP  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
This area indicates the tracks of  
currently-loaded data. In this ex-  
ample, tracks 1 and 2 are being  
loaded. This will change to 3 and 4,  
then 5 and 6.  
This area indicates a negative value of  
the total duration required to load data,  
which counts up as the load operation  
progresses.  
During the load operation, the LEDs of the RECORD TRK  
select keys 1/L and 2/R flash, and the level meters for  
tracks 1 and 2, and L and R reflect the levels.  
You can monitor the data using the following methods:  
• Using the monitor selector [MON]  
Turning the MON knobs for channels 1 and 2 toward [TRK 1] and  
[TRK 2] respectively  
Turning the MASTER knob in the monitor section  
Whenthesaveoperationiscomplete, [COMPLETED!]lights  
up on the display, and FD-4 stops. Stop playing the DAT  
machine.  
9. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
[COMPLETED !] disappears, the Program for the data you  
loaded is selected, and the ABS Time Base appears.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)  
SETUP mode of the FD-4 offers the “Changing the initial  
settings” menus that configure the operating environment  
Selecting SETUP mode  
Follow the steps below to select the desired SETUP menu in  
SETUP mode.  
of the FD-4, and the “Execution” menus that execute cer-  
tain operations, such as save and load.  
The “Changing the initial settings” menus include 16 pa-  
rameters as shown in Table-1 below. These parameters were  
set before the unit was shipped from the factory (These  
values are called “initial settings.”). Modifying these set-  
tings allows you to change the operating environment of  
the FD-4.  
Also, as shown in Table-2, the “Execution” menus include  
five items: Title Edit?, Del. PGM?, Load PGM?, Save PGM?,  
and Format?, which you can execute by selecting the corre-  
sponding SETUP menu. This chapter explains how to use  
the “Changing the initial settings” menus shown in Table-  
1. For more information on the “Execution” menus, refer to  
the corresponding pages in the “Reference page” column  
in Table-2.  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key on the  
control panel.  
Pressing the SETUP key causes the FD-4 to enter SETUP  
mode. The FD-4 displays the first hierarchy level of the  
SETUPmenuyouselectedbeforeyouturnedoffthepower.  
At this time, the menu graphics appear as shown below.  
The flashing menu indicator is the currently-selected  
menu. Turning the JOG dial will select a different menu  
and the corresponding menu indicator will flash.  
The following diagram shows the position of each menu.  
The title of the SETUP menu ap-  
This lights up when the FD-4  
enters SETUP mode.  
pears. You can select a different  
menu via the JOG dial.  
<Table-1> “Changing the initial settings” menus  
SETUP  
Parameters  
“Setting a time signature”  
“Setting a tempo”  
“Setting the Metronome function”  
“Setting a preroll value”  
“Setting MIDI sync output signal”  
“Setting an MTC frame rate”  
“Setting an MTC offset value”  
“Setting Offset mode”  
Default setting  
001 BAR 4/4  
001 BAR1 120  
OFF  
Refer page  
82  
83  
85  
85  
86  
87  
87  
88  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
00  
CLK (Clock)  
25 frame  
00h59m57s00f00sf  
ABS  
This indicates the position of the SETUP menu. Selecting a menu  
via the JOG dial will move the flashing cursor.  
“Setting the Slave mode”  
“Setting the Slave type”  
“Setting the Record Protect function” OFF  
OFF  
Vari  
88  
89  
90  
<Note>  
With the factory initial settings, or when you turn on the power again after  
you format an external SCSI disk, “Sign. Set? (Setting a time signature)”  
appears. Otherwise, the first hierarchy level of the previously-selected  
SETUP menu appears.  
“Setting digital input tracks”  
“Setting digital output tracks”  
“Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode” OFF  
“Setting the MIDI device number” 00  
L-, r- (no assign)  
L- , r- (ST OUT)  
91  
92  
92  
93  
Format ? menu  
Sign. Set ? menu  
Tempo Set ? menu  
Title Edit ? menu  
<Table-2> “Execution” menu  
Save PGM ? menu  
Load PGM ? menu  
Device ID ? menu  
Items  
Refer page  
Del PGM ? menu  
Click ? menu  
Editing a Program title  
Deleting a Program  
Saving song data to an external DAT  
Loading song data from an external DAT  
Formatting an external SCSI disk  
38  
39  
77  
79  
6-8  
Resolu ? menu  
Preroll ? menu  
Digi. out ? menu  
Digi. in ? menu  
Sync Out? menu  
Rec Protect ? menu  
Slave Type? menu  
Slave Mode? menu  
Frame Rate ? menu  
Mtc Offset ? menu  
Ofset Mode ? menu  
2. Select the desired menu using the JOG dial, then press the  
EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-4 displays the second hierarchy level of the  
selected SETUP menu, where you can set parameters.  
(Refer to the next page for more information.)  
To exit SETUPmode, press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each  
time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to the previous hier-  
archy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
• Rotate the JOG dial to enter the desired measure number.  
If you wish to keep the initial setting for the first measure, enter 002. If you  
try to enter any number other than 001, the time signature indicator shows  
“- -..” This means that no time signature is set for any measures other  
than the first measure. To change the time signature for the first  
measure, follow the steps below, without entering any other measure  
number.  
Setting a time signature  
Using the “Setting a time signature” menu, you can set a  
time signature of a given measure on the internal program-  
mable Tempo Map. For example, you can specify “4/4 for  
the first and second measures, and 2/4 from the third mea-  
sure.” Setting a time signature and tempo will create a  
Tempo Map, which allows the FD-4 to manage a song using  
the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. You can also use the Metro-  
nome function. The time signature and tempo setting are  
required when MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer are out-  
put to an external sequencer.  
• Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to display flashing “--” of “- -” and enter the time  
signature using the JOG dial.  
The following measure numbers and time signatures can  
be entered via the JOG dial.  
• Initial setting: 4/4 for bar 001 (not specified for 002 and later.)  
• Setting range of measures: 001 – 999  
Measures  
001–999, selection of All Clear? indication  
“All Clear?” means that data in its entirety will be  
cleared. This is used to initialize the parameter. (Re  
fer to “Clearing stored time signature/tempo data.”)  
• Setting range of time signatures: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8,  
6/8, 7/8, 8/8, -/- (delete)  
• Max. setting points: 64 points  
Time signatures 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8, --  
“--” means no time signature assigned, and is used  
to delete time signature data. (Refer to “Modifying  
(or deleting) stored time signatures” for more  
information.)  
* You can set time signatures for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Storing a time signature  
<Note>  
1. Select a Program for which to set a time signature.  
Refer to “Using the Program Change function” on page  
37 for information on selecting a Program.  
You cannot assign “- -” to measure 001.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key whenever you enter a pair of  
measure/time signature values.  
Repeat this step to specify the necessary time signature  
for the measures.  
2. Press the SETUP key, use the JOG dial to select the  
“Sign. Set?” menu, then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The indication changes to “Sign. Chk” and the current  
time signature appears. The initial setting is “001BAR 4  
4” (4/4 for the first measure).  
To cancel the setting operation, or to exit SETUPmode after storing  
data, press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you  
press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to the previous hierarchy  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Modifying (or deleting) stored time signatures  
SETUP  
1. Repeat steps 1–3 described in the “Storing a time  
signature” section to display “Sign.Edit.”  
BAR  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button so that the flashing cursor is on the time signature  
value.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
At this time, rotating the JOG dial clockwise enables you  
to check the current time signatures in sequence.  
With the initial setting, time signatures after the first  
measure are all “---BAR- -.” This means that a time  
signature of 4/4 applies to all measures.  
3. Use the JOG dial to enter a new value.  
Entering “--” deletes the existing data. Note that you  
cannot enter “--” for measure 001.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
To cancel the setting operation, or to exit SETUPmode after storing  
data, press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you  
press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to the previous hierarchy  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.  
TheindicationchangestoSign.Editand001(measure)”  
of “001BAR”4 4” flashes. You can enter any time  
signature here.  
SETUP  
BAR  
<Caution>  
If modifying or deleting the stored time signature causes the bar/beat  
setting for the tempo specified in the “Setting a tempo” menu to dis-  
appear, the tempo setting will also be automatically erased.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Clearing all time signature and tempo settings  
Setting a tempo  
The “Setting a tempo” menu enables you to specify a tempo  
at a given point in a song that already has a time signature  
setting. For example, you can specify a tempo of 150 to the  
third beat of the 12th measure.  
Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map,  
which is used by the FD-4 to manage the song using the  
BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base, and enable the Metronome func-  
tion. Tempo settings as well as time signature settings are  
required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song  
Position Pointer to an external sequencer.  
<Caution>  
Using this function will erase not only the time signature setting but  
also the tempo data specified in the “Setting a tempo” menu de-  
scribed in the next section.  
1. Repeat steps 1–3 described in the “Storing a time  
signature” section to display “Sign.Edit.”  
2. While the measure number is flashing, turn the JOG dial  
counter-clockwise to select “All Clear?.”  
• Initial setting: bar 001, beat 1: 120  
• Setting range of measures: Determined by the time signature  
setting.  
When “All Clear?” appears, “SURE?” flashes, and you can  
clear the time signature and tempo data in the next step.  
• Setting range of beats: Determined by the time signature setting.  
• Setting range of tempo: 30–250/quarter note, --- (delete)  
• Max. setting points: 64 points  
SETUP  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
* You can set the tempo for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
To cancel the All Clear operation, press the STOP button  
or the EXIT/NO key now. Each time you press one of these  
keys, the FD-4 returns to the previous hierarchy level of  
the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.  
Checking the stored tempo setting  
1. Select a Program to check the tempo setting for.  
Press the SETUPkey, use the JOG dial to select the “Tempo  
Set?” menu, then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Indication on the display changes as shown below, and  
the current tempo appears. The initial setting is [001 BAR  
1 TEMPO 120]. This means that a tempo for the first  
beat of the first measure is set to 120.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The stored time signature and tempo data in its entirety  
are cleared, and the initial settings are restored.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
BAR  
TEMPO  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Rotate the JOG dial clockwise.  
You can view the current tempo values in sequence.  
Tempo value [- - - BAR - TEMPO - - -] means that no  
tempo values are specified after the current setting.  
With the initial setting, [001 BAR 1 TEMPO 120] is  
followed by [- - - BAR - TEMPO - - -].  
Storing a tempo value  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display indicates “Tempo Edit” and “TEMPO” flashes.  
(See the figure below.) This means that you can enter a  
value now.  
SETUP  
BAR  
TEMPO  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
4. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to move the flashing cursor to the desired edit  
location, and use the JOG dial to enter the bar/beat/tempo  
information to be stored.  
Modifying (or deleting) stored tempo settings  
1. Repeat steps 1–3 described in the “Storing a tempo value”  
section to display “Tempo Edit?”  
Pressing the HOLD/> key or the F FWD button repeatedly  
will move the flashing cursor from TEMPO to BAR and to  
, then returns to TEMPO.  
Pressing the REWIND button repeatedly will move the  
cursor in the opposite direction.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button so that the flashing cursor is on the measure  
num ber. Turn the JOG dial to select bar/beat to edit or  
delete.  
3. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button so that the flashing cursor is on the TEMPO number.  
The bar and beat settings for the time signatures deter  
mine the setting range of bar and beat settings for the  
tempo. You can specify a tempo between 30 and 250 per  
quarter note.  
The indication [---] means “no tempo,” which is used to  
delete a tempo setting.  
4. Use the JOG dial to enter a new value.  
Entering “--” deletes the data at the selected bar/beat.  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
When you turn the JOG dial, [---] appears for the bars and  
beats for which no tempo has been set.  
6. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key repeatedly to  
exit SETUP mode.  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the stored bar/beat/tempo, then  
returns to the Tempo Edit indication (as shown in step 3).  
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to store necessary tempo data.  
For example, if you specify tempo values in the song with  
[001 BAR 4 4] and [005 BAR 3 4] settings, the Tempo  
Map includes the settings shown in the table below.  
4
4
Tempo=90  
Tempo=120  
3
4
Tempo=120  
Tempo=60  
Tempo Map  
Tempo setting  
Time signature setting  
001 BAR 1 TEMPO 120  
003 BAR 1 TEMPO 90  
001 BAR 4  
005 BAR 3  
4
4
005 BAR 3 TEMPO 60  
007 BAR 2 TEMPO 120  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting the Metronome function  
Setting a preroll value  
“Setting the Metronome function” menu allows you to de-  
termine whether or not the FD-4 outputs a metronome  
sound from Real track 4 during playback or recording.  
Turning the Metronome function on enables you to record  
your performance while playing the instrument accompa-  
nying the metronome sound.  
The FD-4 features the Preroll function that enables you to  
locate a position a few seconds prior to a specified locate  
point. The “Setting a preroll value” menu allows you to set  
the preroll time (in seconds).  
The Preroll function is convenient when you wish to moni-  
tor the audio data from a point slightly before the locate  
point.  
<Note>  
• Initial setting: 00 second  
Since Real track 4 outputs the metronome sound when this function  
is turned on, you cannot play the audio recorded on this track. Also,  
do not record any data on track 4.  
The FD-4 can output the metronome sound even from an unre-  
corded area (outside of the range fromABS 0 toABS REC END) on  
track 4.  
• Setting range of preroll time: 00-10 seconds in one second steps  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Locate point (stored in the  
memory key)  
This point is actually located.  
• Initial setting: oFF  
• Option: oFF, on  
* You can turn the function on and off for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
This point is located if the cur-  
rent position is after the locate  
point.  
This point is located if the  
current position is before  
the locate point.  
Preroll time (before the locate point)  
can be set between 00 and 10 sec-  
onds.  
Setting the Metronome function  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
Setting a preroll time  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Click ?] (? flashes.), then press  
the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current setting (oFF or on) appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key lights up the flashing [?]  
character steadily; the current setting flashes. The initial  
setting is [oFF] as shown below.  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Preroll ?] (? flashes.), then press  
the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current preroll time setting appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key lights up the flashing [?]  
character steadily; the current setting flashes. The initial  
setting is [00] as shown below.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SETUP  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
3. Turn the JOG dial to select on or oFF.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Selecting [on] will enable the output of the metronome  
sound. Selecting [oFF] (initial setting) will disable the  
metronome output.  
3. Turn the JOG dial to enter a desired preroll time value.  
You can set a value in one-second increments. Rotating  
the JOG dial clockwise increases the value, and rotating it  
counter-clockwise decreases the value.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the selection (on or oFF), then returns  
to the indication in step 2.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the value, then returns to the  
indication that appeared in step 2.  
To cancel the setting operation, or to restore a setting obtained prior  
to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP button or the  
EXIT/NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4  
returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits  
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
To cancel the setting operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO  
key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to the  
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode and  
displays the previous Time Base.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Setting MIDI sync output signal  
The selected MIDI sync signal type is stored, and the FD-  
4 returns to the display with the flashing [?] indicator as  
shown in step 2.  
The “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu enables you to  
select the type of MIDI sync signals output from the MIDI  
OUT connector on the rear panel of the FD-4 to an external  
MIDI device.  
Each option appears on the display as follows.  
The options are MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, or MTC  
(MIDI time code). Select an appropriate option depending  
on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI de-  
vice.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
When CLK is selected:  
SYNC OUT  
When MTC is selected:  
MTC  
If you select MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, first you  
need to set the time signatures and tempo as described  
previously. If you select MTC, you first need to set the MTC  
frame rate, the MTC offset time, and the MTC offset mode  
as described later.  
SYNC OUT  
When OFF is selected:  
To cancel the setting operation, or to restore a setting obtained prior  
to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP button or the  
EXIT/NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4  
returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits  
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
<Note>  
The FD-4 can output MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, and MTC  
even from an unrecorded area (outside of the range of ABS 0 to  
ABS REC END).  
• Initial setting: CLK (clock & Song Position Pointer)  
• Option: CLK (clock & Song Position Pointer),  
MIDI (MIDI time code), OFF (no output)  
* You can set the parameters for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Setting MIDI sync signal  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
2. Rotate the JOG dial to select [Sync Out ?] (? flashes.), then  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The currently-selected MIDI sync signal type appears on  
the display.  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key to turn off the flashing [?]  
indication. The MIDI sync signal type indication flashes,  
SYNC OUT  
and the  
OUT setting.  
indicator flashes indicating the SYNC  
CLK  
The initial setting is [cLk] as shown below.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Turn the JOG dial to select the desired MIDI sync signal.  
Setting this parameter to [cLK] (initial setting) will select  
MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer.  
Setting the parameter to [MTC] will select MIDI time code.  
With the [oFF] setting, no MIDI sync signal will be output.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting an MTC frame rate  
Setting an MTC offset value  
The “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu enables you to set  
the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT connec-  
tor of the FD-4 to an external MIDI device. If you have al-  
ready set the type of MIDI sync output signal to [MTC], you  
need to set the frame rate. Use the frame rate of MTC re-  
ceived by the external MIDI device (or sequence software).  
The “Setting an MTC offset value” menu enables you to  
specify an offset time value – the difference between the  
time of MTC output from the FD-4 and the ABS 00m 00s  
00f 00sf time. You need to specify this value if you have  
selected [MTC] for the “Setting MIDI sync output signal”  
menu.  
With the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf, for ex-  
ample, MTC of 59m 57s 00f 00sf is output at the ABS time  
00m 00s 00f 00sf. You can also set an offset value from the  
001 BAR 1 00 CLK value (bar/beat) on the Tempo Map.  
Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset  
mode.  
• Initial setting: 25 frames  
• Setting range of frame rate: 24, 25, 30df, 30nd  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
• Initial setting: 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf  
• Setting range of offset time: 00h 00m 00s 00f 00sf – 23h 59m 59s  
29f 99sf  
Setting an MTC frame rate  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Frame Rate (?)] (“e” and “?”  
flash alternately.), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current frame rate setting appears on the display.  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key to turn off the flashing [?]  
character; the current setting flashes. The initial setting  
of [25] flashes as shown below.  
Setting an MTC offset  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Mtc Offset (?)] (“t” and “?”  
flash alternately.), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current offset value appears on the display. Pressing  
the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?] character,  
and the value in seconds flashes.  
SETUP  
F
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
You can enter a value at the flashing digit. The number  
“57” of the initial setting [57s] flashes as shown below.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
MTC OFFSET  
SF  
SETUP  
F
SETUP  
F
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Turn the JOG dial to enter the desired frame rate.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise or counter-clockwise  
displays available frame rates as an alternative.  
MTC OFFSET  
SF  
SETUP  
F
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected frame rate is stored and the display returns  
to the indication with a flashing [?] that appeared in step  
2.  
3. Use the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to move the flashing cursor, and turn the JOG dial to  
enter the desired offset value.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
Press the HOLD/> key or the F FWD button to move the  
flashing cursor to the right, and press the REWIND  
button to move it to the left. Turning the JOG dial  
continuously will round up the number to the next digit.  
For example, if you rotate the JOG dial on the seconds  
digit up 59, turning the dial further will increase the  
number on the digit of minute by one.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected offset value is stored and the display  
returns to the indication with the flashing [?] that  
appeared in step 2.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to the  
EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO  
key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to the  
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode  
and displays the previous Time Base.  
SETUP  
F
ABS  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Note>  
SETUP  
F
For example, if you set MTC Offset mode to [ABS] (see the next  
section) and you wish to start the song from MTC’s 1h 00m 00s 00f,  
you may wish to set a preroll of three seconds with an MTC offset of  
00h 59m 57s 00f.  
ABS  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to select the desired Offset mode.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise or counter-clockwise will  
alternately show a flashing “AS 00h 00m 00s 00f” and  
“001BAR 1 ”.  
If you select [ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f], the specified MTC  
offset time is output at ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f.  
If you select [001BAR 1 ], the specified MTC offset time is  
output at 001 BAR 1 00 CLK of the Tempo Map.  
Setting Offset mode  
If you have selected [MTC] in the “Setting Offset mode”  
menu, you need to select MTC Offset mode. This menu en-  
ables you to determine whether the specified MTC is out-  
put at ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f or at 001 BAR 1 00 CLK (bar/  
beat) of the Tempo Map.  
SETUP  
F
SETUP  
BAR  
ABS  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Note>  
As an example, if you set MTC Offset mode to [ABS] and you wish to  
start the song from MTC’s 1h 00m 00s 00f, you may want to set a  
preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s 00f.  
If you select [BAR ] as the MTC Offset mode, a preroll of two mea-  
sures is automatically set. Use 01h 00m 00s 00f; do not set a preroll  
value.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected offset mode is stored and the display  
returns to the indication with flashing [e] and [?].  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
<Note>  
If you set Offset mode to [BAR ] and use MTC to synchronize  
sequence software on the computer, the tempo of the sequencer  
may sometimes slip gradually. This is because the tempo of the FD-  
4 and the tempo of the software are slightly different even if both use  
the same tempo. Some sequence software can read the tempo out-  
put from the FD-4 correctly. We recommend that you use the tempo  
of the FD-4 on the sequence software.  
No such problems will occur if the sequence software synchronizes  
the FD-4 via MIDI clock, instead of MTC.  
Setting the Slave mode  
• Initial setting: ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f  
• Offset mode option: ABS (00h 00m 00s 00f), BAR  
(001 BAR 1 )  
The “Setting the Slave mode” menu allows you to set Slave  
mode of the FD-4 to on and off.  
When Slave mode is turned on, the FD-4 will lock to MTC  
input from the master device. The FD-4 can also sync to the  
selected external sync signal if you select an appropriate  
Slave type.  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
With this menu setting, you can set up a system in which  
multiple FD-4s operate in sync or an FD-4 synchronizes to  
a Fostex digital multitrack recorder, as well as the FD-4 lock-  
ing to MTC output from the sequence software.  
Setting MTC Offset mode  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
• Initial setting: oFF  
• Option: on or oFF  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Offset Mode (?)] (“e” and “?”  
flash alternately.), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current offset mode appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key to turn off the flashing [?]  
character.  
The Offset mode indicator flashes.  
With the initial setting, [ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f] flashes as  
shown below.  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.  
* The sampling rate is automatically checked before the operation.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Turning Slave mode on and off  
Setting the Slave type  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
The “Setting the Slave type” menu enables you to select the  
type of external sync signal used when the FD-4 is set as a  
slave to sync to an external device.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Slave Mode (?)] (“e” and “?”  
flash alternately), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current slave mode appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the Slave mode indicator flashes.  
With the initial setting, [oFF] flashes as shown below.  
• Initial setting: VAri  
• Option: VAri: The FD-4 synchronizes only to external MTC.  
• SPdiF: The FD-4 locks to MTC, then synchronizes to incoming  
S/ PDIF digital signals.  
• FrEE: The FD-4 locks to MTC, then synchronizes to the internal  
clock.  
SETUP  
* You can set the parameter for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.  
* The sampling rate is automatically checked before the operation.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
Setting the Slave type (external sync signal)  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Slave Type (?)] (“e” and “?”  
flash alternately), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current Slave type appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the Slave type indicator flashes.  
With the initial setting, [VAri] flashes as shown below.  
3. Use the JOG dial to turn Slave mode on and off.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter-clockwise  
alternates flashing [on] and [oFF].  
Selecting [on] turns Slave mode on, and selecting [oFF]  
turns Slave mode off.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
SETUP  
If you select [oFF], “e” and “?” flash alternately.  
If you select [on], “e” and “?” flash alternately and [SLAVE]  
flashes as shown below.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
This means that the FD-4 has not locked to the sync  
signal.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
When the FD-4 locks to the sync signal from the master  
device, [SLAVE] lights up steadily.  
SETUP  
After you set Slave mode to [on], you need to select the  
Slave type (type of sync signal) described in the next  
section.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SLAVE  
SETUP  
3. Use the JOG dial to select the desired Slave type.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter-clockwise  
will cause the [VAri], [SPdiF], and [FrEE] indicators to flash  
in sequence.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Recording enabled/disabled  
<Note>  
• You need to input MTC from an external device to the FD-4 with  
any Slave type (external sync signal).  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
• The FD-4 re-chase window is fixed to ten frames. That is, if an  
offset between the master device and slave device exceeds ten  
frames, the FD-4 interprets that as out of sync, and tries to chase  
and lock to MTC sent from the master device. (This operation is  
called “re-chasing.”) During the re-chase operation, audio output  
is muted. If the slave machine slips with MTC from the master  
device by less than ten frames, the slave machine continues  
running while recognizing the slippage.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Rec Protct (?)] (“t” and “?” flash  
alternately), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current setting appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the recording enabled/disabled indicator  
flashes.  
With the initial setting, [oFF] flashes as shown below.  
SETUP  
<Note>  
• This menu is used to select a digital signal used for external syn  
chronization when Slave mode is turned on. If you wish to specify  
the type of digital signals to record, you need to use the “Setting  
digital input tracks” menu.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
• When you set the Slave type, the Vari Pitch function is  
automatically disabled. (The [VARI PITCH] indicator turns off.)  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected Slave type is stored, and “e” and “?” flash  
alternately.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to enable or disable recording.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter-clockwise  
will flash [on] and [oFF] alternately.  
Selecting [oFF] enables recording; you can record, paste,  
and erase data.  
<Note>  
• If you set the Slave type to [SP diF] (S/P DIF digital signal),  
[DIGITAL] lights up on the display when the FD-4 receives a  
normal digital signal from the external device. If the signal is  
abnormal, the [DIGITAL] and FS (sampling rate) indicators flash  
to give you an alarm.  
Selecting [on] disables recording; and you cannot record,  
paste, or erase data.  
• If you set the Slave type to [SP diF] (S/P DIF digital signal),  
approximately two seconds of the sound in the entire system will  
be muted when the FD-4 locks or unlocks to clock. Make sure to  
input a stable digital signal source.  
<Note>  
When recording is disabled (on) and you try to record, paste, or  
erase data, the FD-4 displays [Protected] for a second, indicating  
that you cannot perform the operation. To perform the operation,  
you need to enable recording (oFF).  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
“t” and “?” flash alternately.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
Setting the Record Protect function  
The FD-4 features the Record Protect function, which is simi-  
lar to the function of record-protect tabs on cassette tapes.  
The “Setting the Record Protect function” menu allows you  
to turn the Record Protect function on and off.  
When this function is turned on, you cannot record, paste,  
or erase data. Use this function to protect your precious  
data from being erased accidentally.  
• Initial setting: oFF  
• Option: on or oFF  
* You can turn the function on and off for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting digital input tracks  
<Note>  
You cannot assign L channel and R channel to the same track.  
If you assign the same track and press the EXECUTE/YES key,  
the last channel you set will have priority, and the first channel will  
be automatically set to [-].  
For example, if you assign L channel to [2], then assign R  
channel to [2], and press the EXECUTE/YES key, L channel will  
be set to [L-], and R channel will be set to [r2].  
The “Setting digital input tracks” menu allows you to as-  
sign digital signals input at the DATA IN connector of the  
FD-4 to the tracks. You can perform digital recording from  
an external digital device (CD, MD, DAT, digital mixer, etc.)  
using this function.  
The number of assignable tracks varies depending on the  
recording mode of the connected SCSI disk. If the disk is  
formatted in Master 1 mode or Normal mode, you can as-  
sign signals to tracks 1–6 (including two Additional tracks).  
If the disk is formatted in Master 2 mode, you can assign  
signals to tracks 1–4.  
• If the SCSI disk has been formatted in Master 1 or Normal  
recording mode, you can assign tracks 5 and 6 (Additional tracks).  
If the disk has been formatted in Master 2 mode, and if you try to  
assign the channel to track 5 and 6 and record data, record  
stand-by mode will be cancelled, and the RECORD TRACK LED  
(L,R) will flash quickly. Refer to “Digital Recording” on page 52 for  
more information.  
• Initial setting: L-, R- (No assign for L and R)  
• Assignable tracks: L channel = 1–6, -- (no assign)  
R channel = 1–6, -- (no assign)  
* If the SCSI disk has been formatted in Master 2, assignable tracks  
are 1–4 for L and R.  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected track assignment is stored, and “?” flashes.  
When the FD-4 receives a correct digital signal,  
[DIGITAL] lights up on the display.  
<Note>  
• If [DIGITAL] flashes on the display, check the connection with the  
external device, and the settings on the FD-4 and the external  
device.  
Setting digital input tracks  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Digi. in ?] (“?” flash alternately),  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current digital input track assignment appears on  
the display. Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the  
flashing [?] character, and the L channel setting of the  
digital input track flashes.  
With the initial setting, L- and r- appear and [L-] flashes  
as shown below. You can select a flashing channel to  
assign a track.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to select a channel (L or r) and use the JOG dial to  
specify a track.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
Setting digital output tracks  
The “Setting digital output tracks” menu enables you to  
assign the track that outputs digital signals from the DATA  
OUT connector of the FD-4 to an external digital device.  
You can send the recorded audio data on the FD-4 to an  
external digital device (MD, DAT, digital mixer, etc.) in the  
digital format. Assignable tracks are tracks 1–4 and s-t (STE-  
REO OUT L, R outputs).  
• Initial setting: L , r  
(STEREO OUT L, R output) = s  
• Assignable tracks: L channel = 1–4, (STEREO OUT L)  
R channel = 1–4, (STEREO OUT R)  
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
The “Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode” menu enables you  
to turn BAR/BEAT resolution mode on and off. The initial  
setting is “off.” When you turn this mode on, the CLK (clock)  
digits will be always round off to 00 and be stored in the  
memory key while the FD-4 is using the BAR/BEAT/CLK  
Time Base. That is, beat resolution is used.  
Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat-  
resolution value of the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT points and other  
points in real-time. (Press the STORE key, then the corre-  
sponding memory key while playing the FD-4.)  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
<IMPORTANT>  
Match the sampling rate of the digital input on the external device  
with the sampling rate of the FD-4 to send digital signals from the  
FD-4 to the external device.  
Therefore, it is very convenient when you perform the Copy  
& Paste or Move & Paste operation in beat-resolution.  
Setting digital output tracks  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
For example, assume that you have stored the value for 001BAR1  
46 CLK as the CLIPBOARD IN point, and the value for 002BAR 4  
51 CLK as the CLIPBOARD OUT point.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Digi. out ?] (“?” flashes), then  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
These values will be used as they are if BAR/BEAT resolution mode  
is turned off. However, the mode is turned on, the following values  
will be stored instead. The following example has a time signature  
setting of 4/4.  
The current digital output track assignment appears on  
the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the L channel setting of the digital output  
track flashes. With the initial setting, L  
appear, and [L ] flashes as shown below. You can select  
a flashing channel to assign a track.  
and r  
001 BAR 1 46 CLK -> 001 BAR 1 00 CLK  
(A CLK value of 46 will be rounded off.)  
002 BAR 4 51 CLK -> 003 BAR 1 00 CLK  
(A CLK value of 51 will be rounded up.)  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
• Initial setting: oFF  
• Options: on, oFF  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
3. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to select a channel (L or r) and use the JOG dial to  
specify a track.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [ Resolu ?] (“?” flashes), then  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current BAR/BEAT resolution mode setting appears  
on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the BAR/BEAT resolution mode setting  
flashes.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected track assignment is stored, and “?” flashes.  
When the FD-4 receives a correct digital signal,  
[DIGITAL] lights up on the display.  
<Note>  
With the initial setting, [oFF] flashes as shown below.  
If [DIGITAL] flashes on the display, check the connection with the  
external device, and the settings on the FD-4 and the external de-  
vice.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting the MIDI device number  
SETUP  
The “Setting the MIDI device number” menu enables you  
to set the FD-4 device ID number required to control the  
unit from a sequence software using MMC (MIDI Machine  
Control) or FEX (Fostex System Exclusive Message).  
The transmit device ID links to this setting.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
You can set the device ID from 00 to 99.  
However, if the device ID number of the message the FD-4  
receives is [7F], the FD-4 will recognizes it to perform the  
corresponding operation, regardless of its device ID set-  
ting.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to turn the mode on or off.  
When you turn the JOG dial clockwise and counter-clock  
wise, [on] and [oFF] flash alternately.  
Selecting [on] turns BAR/BEAT resolution mode on, and  
selecting [oFF] turns BAR/BEAT resolution mode off.  
• Initial setting: 00  
• Device ID: 00–99  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected mode setting is stored, and “?” flashes.  
Setting the MIDI device ID  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
1. While the FD-4 is stopped, press the SETUP key to enter  
SETUP mode.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Device ID?] (“?” flashes), then  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current MIDI device ID number appears on the  
display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the MIDI device ID number flashes.  
With the initial setting, [00] flashes as shown below.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to set the desired MIDI device ID number.  
Turning the JOG dial clockwise increments the value, and  
turning it counter-clockwise decrements the value.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The MIDI device ID number is stored, and “?” flashes.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained prior to  
the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOPbutton or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-4 returns to  
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List/Maintenance/Specifications  
(Digital Multitracker)  
Date:  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Version: V1.00  
Model FD-4  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Function.....................  
X
X
X
X
Basic  
Default  
Channel  
Changed  
X
X
X
X
X
Default  
Message  
Altered  
Mode  
*******************************  
X
X
Note  
X
True voice  
Number:  
*******************************  
X
X
X
X
Velocity  
Note ON  
Note OFF  
X
X
After  
X
X
Key’s  
Channel’s  
Touch  
Pitch Bend  
X
X
X
X
Control  
Change  
X
X
Program  
Change:  
X
True #  
*******************************  
System Exclusive  
(rem. 1)  
(rem. 2)  
: Quarter frame  
X
X
X
: Song Position  
: Song Select  
: Tune  
Common  
X
X
X
X
: Clock  
System  
: Commands  
Real Time  
(rem. 3)  
: Local ON/OFF  
: All Notes OFF  
: Active Sense  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Aux.  
Message  
X
X
: Reset  
rem. 1: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Identity reply, FOSTEX Exclusive  
rem. 2: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Inquiry, FOSTEX Exclusive  
Notes  
rem. 3: START, STOP, CONTINUE  
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO  
: Yes  
X: No  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List/Maintenance/Specifications  
MMC Command List  
Command List  
Movement (Recorder)  
01: STOP  
02: PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
03: DEFERRED PLAY  
DEFERRED PLAY  
04: FAST FORWARD  
05: REWIND  
F FWD  
REWIND  
06: RECORD STROBE  
07: RECORD EXIT  
09: PAUSE  
REC  
PUNCH OUT  
STOP  
40: WRITE  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
LOCATE to Setting Data  
CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
41: MASKED WRITE  
42: READ  
44: LOCATE  
47: SHUTTLE  
4C: MOVE  
4D: ADD  
4E: SUBTRACT  
MMC Response/Information Field List  
01: SELECTED TIME CODE  
03: REQUESTED OFFSET  
04: ACTUAL OFFSET  
08: GP 0  
Command  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE  
READ  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ  
09: GP 1  
0A: GP 2  
0B: GP 3  
0C: GP 4  
0D: GP 5  
0E: GP 6  
0F: GP 7  
48: MOTION CONTROL TALLY  
4C: RECORD MODE  
4E: TRACK RECORD STATUS  
4F: TRACK RECORD READY  
51: RECORD MONITOR  
READ/WRITE  
READ  
READ/WRITE/MASKED WRITE  
READ/WRITE  
Inquiry Message List  
IDENTITY REQUEST: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7  
IDENTITY REPLY: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 0F, 00, 01, 00, 7F, 7F, F7  
51: Fostex ID  
01, 00: Device family code  
0F, 00: Device family number FD-4  
01, 00, 7F, 7F: Software version  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List/Maintenance/Specifications  
Maintenance  
Cleaning the exterior  
* For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth  
For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off.  
Then polish with a dry cloth.  
Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will damage the printing and finish of the exterior.  
Specifications  
* Mixer section  
<RECORDER IN L, R>  
Connector  
: RCA Pin jack (x 2)  
: 20k ohm or higher  
<INPUT 1, 2>  
Connector  
Input Impedance  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
Reference Input Level : -10dBV  
Input Impedance  
: 20k ohm or higher  
Reference Input Level : -10dBV  
<DATA IN/OUT>  
Connector  
Format  
: Optical (x 2)  
<INPUT 3, 4>  
Connector  
: IEC 958 Part 3 (S/P DIF)  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
: XLR-3-31 type (x 2)  
: 20k ohm or higher  
<MIDI IN/OUT>  
Connector  
Format  
Input Impedance  
: DIN 5 pin  
: MIDI  
Reference Input Level : L: -50dBV, M: -30dBV,  
L: -10dBV  
<PUNCH IN/OUT>  
<INSERT 3, 4>  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 1)  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
(An optional FOOT SW Model 8051 can be connected.)  
Load Impedance  
: 10k ohm or higher  
<Equalizer>  
HI  
Reference Output Level : -10dBV  
: 12kHz +/-15dB (Shelving Type)  
Input Impedance  
: 10k ohm or higher  
MID  
LO  
: 200Hz ~ 5kHz +/- 15dB (Parametric Type)  
: 80Hz +/- 15dB (Shelving Type)  
Reference Input Level : -10dBV  
<AUX SEND 1, 2>  
<Frequency Response>  
: 20Hz ~ 20kHz  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
Load Impedance  
: 10k ohm or higher  
Reference Output Level : -10dBV  
* Recorder section  
<AUX RTN 1, 2>  
<Recording/Reproducing>  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 4)  
Recording Medium  
: External SCSI device  
Input Impedance  
: 8k ohm or higher  
(SCSI-2, asymmetrical transfer)  
: Internal 2.5 inch hard disk (E-  
IDE type)  
Reference Input Level : -20dBV  
<STEREO OUT L, R>  
: Connectable SCSI device: One  
Connector  
: RCA pin jack (x 2)  
: 10k ohm or higher  
Load Impedance  
<Recording Format>  
: FDMS-3*  
Reference Output Level : -10dBV  
(* Fostex Disk Management  
System-3)  
<MONITOR OUT L, R>  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
<Recording Mode>  
Load Impedance  
: 10k ohm or higher  
Normal Mode  
: 4 Real track + 2 Additional  
track (Sampling Rate: 32kHz/  
DAC*)  
Reference Output Level : -10dBV  
<PHONES OUT>  
(*) Digital Audio Acoustic  
Coding)  
Connector  
:
6mm Stereo Phone jack  
Load Impedance  
: 16 ohm or higher  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List/Maintenance/Specifications  
Mastering Mode 1  
: 4 Real track + 2 Additional  
<Total harmonic distortion> : 0.008% (Mastering mode 1, 2)  
track (Sampling Rate: 44.1kHz/  
16-bit linear)  
<Tempo map>  
Signature  
: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8,  
5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8  
Mastering Mode 2  
: 4 Real track (Sampling Rate:  
44.1kHz/16-bit linear)  
Tempo  
: quarter note (1/4 note) = 30 ~ 250  
<Digital Input/Output>  
* 32kHz/16-bit linear (Normal mode), Corresponds to  
DAT 32kHz/SP mode.  
* General  
<Dimensions (mm)>  
<Weight>  
: 402 (W) x 110 (H) x 355 (D)  
: Approx. 4kg  
* 44.1kHz/16-bit linear (Mastering mode 1, 2)  
<Save/Load>  
: FDIO-1*  
<Power supply>  
: AC 120V, 60Hz  
(*) Fostex Data Input /Output-1)  
: AC 230V ~ , 50/60Hz  
<Power Consumption>  
: 15W  
<Recording Track> : 2 tracks (Analog x 2, or Digital x 2)  
<Playback Track>  
<Program No.>  
<Vari pitch.>  
: 4 tracks  
* Specifications and appearance are subject to change  
without notice for product improvement.  
: Maximum 99 tunes  
: +/-6%  
<Crossfade>  
: 10msec.  
<Recording/reproducing frequency>  
: 20Hz ~ 15.5kHz (Normal mode)  
: 20Hz ~ 20kHz (Mastering mode 1, 2)  
<Dynamic Range> : 90dB  
Block Diagram  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
INPUT 1  
-10dBV  
PAN  
MASTER  
STEREO OUT  
L
TRK 1  
FADER  
L
R
EQ  
R
AUX 1  
AUX SEND  
1
HI  
GAIN  
LO  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
SHIFT  
AUX 2  
2
PHONES  
MON OUT  
MON L  
MON R  
INPUT  
MON  
TRK 1  
MON SEL  
L/R  
L/R +MON  
TRK 1  
MON  
REC MUTE 1  
INPUT 1  
L
R
MON  
TRK 2  
REC MUTE 2  
INPUT 2  
INSERT3  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT 3  
-50dBV -10dBV  
INPUT  
FADER  
TRK 3  
PAN  
L
1/3/L  
RECORDER IN  
2/4/R  
EQ  
R
TRIM  
AUX 1  
HARD DISK  
DIGI IN SETUP  
RECORD TRACK  
LO  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
SHIFT  
HI  
GAIN  
ADC  
1
2
DAC  
DAC  
DAC  
DAC  
TRK.1  
TRK.2  
TRK.3  
TRK.4  
TRK.L  
TRK.R  
AUX 2  
MON L  
BAL  
ADC  
INPUT  
MON  
TRK 3  
3
4
MON R  
TRK 3  
REC MUTE 3  
INPUT 3  
DG OUT SETUP  
L
TRK 4  
L
REC MUTE 4  
INPUT 4  
R
L
R
L/MONO  
-20dBV  
AUX RTN  
L
DATA IN  
L
R
DATA OUT  
R
R
R
AUX RTN 1  
AUX RTN 2  
L
R
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of EC Directive  
This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Directive on approximation of mem-  
ber nation's ordinance concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive  
(73/23/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance concerning electric equipment  
designed to be used within the specified voltage range.  
The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment  
The affect of the European specification EN50082-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves - common immunity specifi-  
cation) on this equipment are as shown below.  
* In the electrical fast transient / burst requirements, radiated electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging envi-  
ronment, this could be affected by generation of noise in some cases.  
FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE  
* Including non - EU countries. * underlined: contracted distributors (as of November, 1997)  
<AUSTRIA>  
<ITALY>  
NAME: ATEC Audio-u. Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH.  
ADD: Im Winkel 5, A-2325 Velm, Austria  
TEL: (+43) 2234-74004, FAX: (+43) 2234-74074  
NAME: Recoton Italia Srl.  
ADD:V. 1 Maggio, N 18, 40050 Quarto Inferiore, (BO) Italy  
TEL: (+39) 51-768576, FAX: (+39) 51-768336  
<BELGIUM>  
<THE NETHERLANDS>  
NAME: EML N. V.  
NAME: IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B. V.  
ADD: Kuiperbergweg 20, 1101 AG Amsterdam, The Nether-  
lands  
ADD: Bijvennestraat 1A, B3500 Hasselt, Belgium  
TEL: (+32) 11-232355, FAX: (+32) 11-232172  
TEL: (+31) 20-697-2121, FAX: (+31) 20-697-4201  
<DENMARK>  
<NORWAY>  
NAME: SC Sound ApS  
ADD: Malervej 2, DK-2630 Taastrup, Denmark  
TEL: (+45) 4399-8877, FAX: (+45) 4399-8077  
NAME: Siv. Ing. Benum A/S  
ADD: P. O. Box 145 Vinderen, 0319 Oslo 3, Norway  
TEL: (+47) 22-139900, FAX: (+47) 22-148259  
<FINLAND>  
<PORTUGAL>  
NAME: Noretron Audio  
ADD: Tonttumuorinkuja 4, FIN-02200 Espoo, Finland  
TEL: (+358) 0-5259330, FAX: (+358) 0-52593352  
NAME: Caius - Tecnologias Audio e Musica, Lda.  
ADD: Rua de Santa Catarina, 131 4000 Porto, Portugal  
TEL: (+351) 2-2084456/325400, FAX: (+351) 1-5930716  
<FRANCE>  
<SPAIN>  
NAME: Musikengro  
ADD: ZAC de Folliouses, B. P. 609, 01706 Les Echets, France  
TEL: (+33) 72 26 27 00, FAX: (+33) 72 26 27 01  
NAME: Multitracker. S. A.  
ADD: C/Garcilaso No. 9, Madrid 28010, Spain  
TEL: (+34) 1-4470700, 1-4470898, FAX: (+34) 1-5930716  
<GERMANY>  
<SWEDEN>  
NAME: Studiosound & Music GmbH  
ADD: Scheppe Gewissegasse 8, D-35039 Marburg, Germany  
TEL: (+49) 6421-12071, FAX: (+49) 6421-15522  
NAME: TTS Tal & Ton Studioteknik AB  
ADD: Gelbgjutarevagen 4, S-171 48 Solna, Sweden  
TEL: (+46) 8-7340750, FAX: (+46) 8-824476  
<GREECE>  
<SWITZERLAND>  
NAME: Bon Studio S. A.  
ADD: 6 Zaimi Street, Exarchia, 106.83 Athens, Greece  
TEL: (+30) 1-3809605-8, 3302059, FAX: (+30) 1-3845755  
NAME: Audio Bauer Pro AG  
ADD: Bernerstrasse-Nord 182, CH-8064 Zurich, Switzerland  
TEL: (+41) 1-4323230, FAX: (+41) 1-4326558  
<ICELAND>  
<UK>  
NAME: I. D. elrf. electronic Ltd.  
ADD: Armula 38 108 Reykjavik, Iceland  
TEL: (+354) 588 5010, FAX: (+354) 588 5011  
NAME: SCV London  
ADD: 3A 6-24 Southgate Road, London N1 3JJ, England, UK  
TEL: (+44) 171-923-1892, FAX: (+44) 171-241-3644  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Move and paste.........................56  
Metronome function........41, 85  
MIDI sync function...................71  
MIDI SYNC OUT setting............86  
MIDI device setting...................93  
MTC frame rate setting............87  
MTCOFFSETtime......................87  
MTC OFFSET MODE..................88  
MIDI implementation chart....94  
MMCcommandlist...................95  
Maintenance...............................96  
Tempo setting............................83  
Track over display....................23  
[A]  
ABS time......................................24  
Additional track...................26,  
30  
[U]  
Analog recording......................28  
Autopunchin/out....................43  
Auto play....................................66  
Autoreturn.................................67  
Autorepeat.................................68  
Undo/redo.......30, 33, 46, 48,  
58, 60  
Unformat display......................22  
[V]  
Varipitchfunction....................40  
Void out display........................22  
Void data display......................22  
[B]  
Backup..............................................76  
[N]  
Bar/beat  
resolution  
Normal mode...............................6  
setting......92  
[W]  
No disk display..........................23  
Warning message......................22  
[C]  
[O]  
Clipboard play....................14, 57  
Copy paste..................................56  
Cue/review function................62  
Can’t Rec display.......................23  
Over display...............................23  
Overdubbing....................................32  
[P]  
Preset display............................21  
Program change........................37  
Program delete..........................38  
Program title..............................39  
Punch in/out..............................43  
Ping pong recording.................49  
Punch in/out take..............45, 47  
Punch in/out rehearsal.....44, 47  
Paste..............................................57  
Preview function.......................69  
Preroll time..........................67, 85  
[D]  
Display............................................20  
Disk remain.........................22, 25  
Disk error....................................23  
Default setting...........................28  
Deleting program......................38  
Direct locate...............................66  
Digital recording.......................52  
Digital mixdown........................54  
[E]  
Erase.................................................58  
[R]  
Entering Setup mode................81  
Recording mode..........................6  
Rec+Yes! display........................23  
Remain.........................................25  
Real track....................................26  
Repro monitor...........................26  
RECORDERINjack.....................55  
Record protect setting............90  
[F]  
Formatting the hard disk...........6  
Frame rate setting.....................87  
[H]  
Handling operation..................24  
[S]  
Shift function.............................14  
Shuttlefunction.........................62  
SCSI connector...........................5  
Select track display...................23  
Stereo bus...................................27  
Setting a program.....................36  
Storing memory data..............63  
Saving data.................................76  
Slave mode setting....................88  
Slave type setting......................89  
Song data...................................76  
SETUP mode..............................81  
Specifications...............................96  
[I]  
Input monitor............................26  
Inquiry message list..................95  
[L]  
Loaderrordisplay.....................23  
Locatefunction..........................66  
Locate point................................63  
Locate ABS 0...............................66  
Locate Rec End...........................66  
Loadingthedata........................79  
[M]  
Masteringmode1........................6  
Masteringmode2........................6  
MTC.......................................21, 24  
Mixdown......................................34  
Manualpunchin/out...............46  
[T]  
Time base....................................24  
Track exchange.........................60  
Time signature setting.............82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOSTEX CORPORATION  
3-2-35, Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo, Japan 196-0021  
FOSTEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA  
15431, Blackburn Ave., Norwalk, CA 90650, U. S. A.  
C PRINTED IN JAPAN APR. 1998 8288 414 100 FX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Eicon Networks Network Card DN I300TEPHMP User Manual
Field Controls Humidifier TM 2000 User Manual
FieldServer Computer Drive FS 8700 105 User Manual
Fisher Paykel Cooktop CE302C User Manual
Fortinet Network Card FortiMail 2000A User Manual
Frigidaire Cooktop 318068129 User Manual
Frymaster Fryer Series H50 User Manual
Fujitsu Network Card FMW43SA1 User Manual
Fujitsu Planer PG 18XX User Manual
GarrettCom Switch P62 Series User Manual